MLR Institute of Technology

Dept. of MECH STUDENT HANDBOOK

MLR Institute of Technology, Dundigal, Hyderabad-500 043 Page 1

MLR Institute of Technology (AUTONOMOUS)

(Affiliated to JNTU & Approved by AICTE)

Dundigal, Quthbullapur Mandal, R.R. Dist.- 500 043.

Ph: 08418 – 204066, 204088, 9866755166

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

About the College

BEAUTIFUL CAMPUS:

Set in Sylvan surroundings away from the hustle & bustle of city life yet only

4 km away from Mahindra Satyam Technology Park on Balanagar – Narsapur

state highway, the Institute is extremely conducive to academic, co-curricular

and extra-curricular activities. It has large and well ventilated buildings with

modern equipment in place and “State of the art”, sports facilities.

HIGHLIGHTS:

FACULTY:

The College is proud to have the best faculty, a blend of experienced and

academics with eminent academicians team IIT’s, NIT’s and other reputed

organizations teaching at the Institute that makes MLRIT as one of the best

Institute pursue B.Tech, M.Tech, MCA and MBA as one of the under JNTU

Hyderabad. The faculty is constantly encouraged to upgrade their

qualifications and a number of them have enrolled for Ph.D. Most of the

faculty members have been empowered with High Impact teaching under

Wipro Mission 10X program.

INFRASTRUCTURES:

The Institute is housed in a RCC Building with a built up area of 2.50 Lakh

Sq. Ft in 10 Acres and established an Air Conditioned Auditorium with

Seminar Halls and a Central Library. A good canteen caters hygienic food and

a fleet of buses running from all important points to bring the students to the

college. Accessibility of HDFC Bank ATM within the Campus is an recent

addition to enable students and faculty to withdraw cash anytime.

LABORATORIES:

The Institute has State of the art laboratories with 500 plus Pentium IV

Branded Systems equipped with latest hardware and software with online

testing facility catering to the needs of CSE, IT. The Institute also has well

equipped Electronic Labs, Aeronautical Engineering Labs and Workshops for

ECE and Aeronautical Engineering Students. The college has recently

established Microsoft, IBM for CSE/IT cadence lab for VLSI design and

CATIA Aeronautical Design Lab.



TOEFL CENTRE:

The Institute is an Authorized TOEFL iBT Centre, which will conduct tests all

through the year as per the IBT schedule.

ENGLISH LANGUAGE LABORATORY:

The Institute has established Ultramodern Computerized English language

Laboratory with 60 plus Computer Systems loaded with latest Software to

enhance the Soft skills of Students to make the Students Industry ready.

R&D Cell:

The Institute has an R&D Cell under the Chairmanship of ?. The R&D cell

undertakes externally funded R&D projects from agencies like AICTE, DST,

UGC and other similar state, private and society / trust bodies. It also

undertakes research publications and interactions of faculty members with

outside world.

LIBRARY:

The Institute Library has over 14598 books and 78 National and International

journals that are required to all branches of Engineering. The Institute has the

unique distinction of becoming Member of DELNET that connects more than

700 libraries in Asia Pacific Region. The Library has 35 Computers with 10

MB PS, Internet Facility that makes our knowledge Savvy Students to be

technically competent on par with Industry professionals.

NATIONAL PROGRAMME ON TECHNOLOGY ENHANCED

LEARNING (NPTEL)

The main objective of NPTEL program is to enhance the quality of

engineering education in the country by developing curriculum based video

and web courses. This is being carried out by seven IITs and IISc Bangalore as

a collaborative project. In the first phase of the project, supplementary content

for 129 web courses in engineering / science and humanities have been

developed. Each course contains materials that can be covered in depth in 60

or more lecture hours. In addition, 110 courses have been developed in video

format, with each course comprising of approximately 60 or more one-hour

lectures. In the next phase other premier institutions are also likely to

participate in content creation.

CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES:

The Institution organizes Local Industrial Visits to Organizations like

DOORDARSHAN, BSNL, and to Student Conferences like HYSEA,

Student Conference at INFOSYS, Gachibowli Campus, and Government

Sponsored Summits like INDO SOFT IT Summit at HITEX City Convention

Centre to Interface with the Industry for Career Planning and to make them

Industry Ready. The Institute focuses on Techno Management Events like

Technonium and ZAVTRA to enhance the Technical Skills and Soft Skills to

make them Employable.

PROFESSIONAL BODIES:

MLR Institute of Technology has the unique distinction of becoming

Institutional Member in Professional bodies such as Confederation of Indian



Industry (CII), Aeronautical Society of India (AeSI), Computer Society of

India (CSI), Institute of Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering

(IETE), Indian Society of Technical Education (ISTE), ELIAP and

Hyderabad Management Association.(HMA)

EXTRA-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES:

The Institute helps the B.Tech, M.Tech and MBA Students to imbibe

Culture, Knowledge and Sportsman Spirit during their Study Period.

The Institution has a Basketball Court, Volley ball Court, Beach Volley ball

Court, Cricket Stadium with 400 meter excellent track for Athletic Meet and

Indoor Stadium for Shuttle Badminton and Gymnasium. MLRIT has been

regularly conducting JNTU Zonal Games Football, Cricket, and State level

Volleyball Tournaments. The Institute has been awarded as the best

organizer for conducting JNTU Zone A Intercollegiate Tournaments by

JNTUH. MLRIT is affiliated to Hyderabad Cricket Association (HCA) to

play league Cricket Matches. The college has conducted 5K RUN in 2008-09

and south zone Cricket Tournament in 2009-10. The college has been

conducting JNTU-H Cricket Tournament in 2009-10.

The Institute also organizes events like Traditional Day, Annual Day,

Fashion Shows, Rockshows and other Cultural Events. MLR Institutions has

been conducting Traditional Day every year. The purpose of Celebrating

traditional day is basically to imbibe a spirit of Oneness, where the First year

Students who have joined the Institute shed their Inhibitions, play and dine

together with their seniors and recollect the old traditions & glory of the Past.

Apart from that the traditional day is being celebrated with a purpose of

removing fear and as a measure of Anti-Ragging activity.

The college has a National Service Scheme (NSS) unit, which conducts a

number of programmes viz blood donation camp, tree plantation, community

services in the adjoining villages, flood relief, etc. The college has sent a

team of volunteers for flood relief service on 14th

October 2009 to Mahaboob

Nagar.

STUDENTS COUNSELING & CAREER SERVICES DEPT

(SCCS – DEPT):

MLRIT is only institution among 600 + professional colleges in AP, that

takes into consideration each student individual aspiration and ambition into

audit, and extend support on exclusive basis to each student for successful

future into Employment/ Entrepreneur/ Research & Development / Higher

Education before graduating from our campus.



FINISHING SCHOOL:

MLR Institute of Technology is the only Institute which offers Speical

Training Programme partnering Institute for Electronic Goverance, Govt of

A.P. and Infosys. The students from the Institute are selected every year and

given special Training programme to make them Industry Grade and

opportunity is given to them to place themselves in Multi National

Companies.

IN HOUSE PROJECTS:

The students are taking part in International Project competitions hosted by

major MNCs, like IBM, Microsoft and Infosys. The Great Mind Challenge

hosted by IBM, Microsoft Imagine Cup and project work as part of

foundation programme conducted under the aegis of Infosys are some of the

important projects presently being undertaken by the students of MLRIT.

Further, the students are encouraged to do In House Projects under the

supervision of expect faculty members.In addition,students are encouraged to

give innovative ideas and do projects under the aegis of Microsoft academic

innovative alliance.

MOUs:

The Institute has MOUs for student and faculty enhancement programmes

with Multi National Companies like

IBM

IBM has extablished “Center of Excellence” in MLRIT

Sun Microsystem Systems

Student Development Programmes and Certificates

Oracle

Faculty and Student Development Programmes

WIPRO: Mission – 10X Programme

Faculty impact teaching programme

CA Labs

Student and Faculty enablement Programme

Infotech

To enhance the quality of educational experience for student community

Mahindra Satyam

Industry Oriented course ware and Technology

Institute of Electronic Governance

Faculty Enablement Programme on “Soft Skills, Technical Skills, Reasoning and Aptitude and

Basic Computer Skills”.



Indo – US Collaboration for Engineering Education

Faculty Development Programme sponsored by Infosys

Microsoft IT Academy

Student and Faculty enablement programme.

Microsoft-Academic Innovative Alliance.

Infosys

Foundation Programme for students

IIIT, Gachibowli, Hyderabad

Certification in Information Technology (CIT) for students

SAM Technologies

In house projects in Robotics and Embedded System

Student Achievements:

Ms. R. PALANIAMMAL of Aeronautical Engineering department has

secured a University Rank and Gold Medal for the batch 2005-2009

A PRAVEEN KUMAR secured 105th

rank in GATE.

Rishit D Shah became the Microsoft Student Partner and Microsoft

Student Campus Ambassador. He is a Microsoft Certified Professional.

N. Sai Praneeth & EaswarReddy also has been selected as a Microsoft

student ambassador.

M.Prashanth Reddy and M. Ramya of CSE Department have been

selected as the Student Ambassador for IBM.

The CSE department students Nikhil Bharadwaj, Shashank and

Sulibhavi Santhosh developed a Google Application connecting all the

institute activities. Lolitha and Gangasudha of IT, Praneeth, Rajender,

Akshay Raj, Harish and Pankaj of CSE, Achuth and Gautam of Aero are

maintaining the application.

M. Pavan Kumar of CSE Department has been selected as brand

Ambassadir if Sun Academic Initiative.

253 students and 5 faculty members have got IBM DB2 Certification as

part of TGMC’09



The Institute has achieved 100% results in Aeronautical Engineering,

99% in CSE, 94% in ECE, 91% in MCA and 83% in MBA Department

for outgoing batches.

The students of MLRIT have won Volleyball Tournament and were

Runner’s in Table Tennis Singles and Dobules JNTU Zone ‘A’ Inter

Collegiate Tournament.

G. Manikanta Gupta, ECE 1st year won “National memory

championship” in abstract imagaes, organized by Worl Memroy Council.

Contact Information

Principal Dr.K.Srinivasa Rao 9848292046

Dean (CS) Prof. K. L. Chugh 9866666601

Department Head CSE Dr.N.ChandraSekhar Reddy 9959535832

Department Head ECE Dr.A.V.Paramkusam 9160404638

Department Head IT Dr.G.Kiran Kumar 9848292046

Department Head AERO Dr.M.S.N.Guptha 9160404640

Department Head MECH Dr.S.Madhu 9160404635

Department Head MBA Dr.S.Suneetha 9160404639

Department Head H&S Dr.V.RadhikaDevi 9848472797



2. PLACEMENT & HIGHER STUDIES

MLR Institute of Technology has a unique distinction of placing their First Batch of

B.Tech Students in their prefinal year of Study and MBA Students in Multi National

Companies. The Institute has so far interacted with more than 69 Companies and

233 Selections from B.Tech/MCA and MBA Programmes have taken Place.

In this direction Apart from the Placements the Institute has arranged Summer

Internship Programmes with Companies like Computer Amociates, Mind Tree M/s

Infotech Enterprises Ltd, Mahindra Finance, Max New York Life Insurance, Nokia

Ltd , Mahindra Finance, Bajaj Capital Ltd, Reliance Money and Tata AIG for

Engineering and MBA Students to develop Mentor Relationships and to get to know

about the Work Culture and gain Competencies to make them Industry Ready

during their Study period.

purposes. Employers give considerable value to these diverse set of skills at

the time of interviews.

In addition to course curriculum, every student will gain the following skills during

the study period:

Analytical and Problem solving skills

Subject – specific knowledge

Research and improved decision making abilities

Oral communication skills

Managerial skills

Understanding of other cultures

The Institute has arranged Campus Recruitment drives with MNC’s like TATA

Advanced systems, IBM, Medha Sevo drives, NR Radio & Switches Pvt. Ltd., Osi

Technologies ltd., Genpact, Reliance Money, Nagarjuna Cements Ltd & Oasis

Software Informatics.

The Institute ortganized an Industrial Tour to 3rd & 4th Year Aeronautical

Engineering students to Satish Dawan Space Center (SHAR) Sriharikota on 16-12- 2009. The 4

th Year students visited Airforce Academy, Dundigal, for an Industrial

Visit on 22-12-2009.

The CSE & ECE students visited Infosys Infosys on 18-07-2009 for the SPARK

Programme which is an orientation programme on Information Technology Space.

2.1 INDUSTRY GRADE SKILLS REQUIRED FOR EMPLOYMENT

Behavioral and Communication Skills are recognized as important elements in

professional development of an Engineer including English for specific



important criteria for employment is that the student should get a minimum of

60% in academics with no backlogs to make them eligible for campus

recruitments. In the recent past, many companies stipulated a cut of 68% for

attending the interview / writing the test. Every student should Endeavour to

achieve a minimum of 68% with no backlogs to make them suitable for

picking up by good companies.

Job Portals:

1. www.freshersworld.com 2. www.monster.com

3. www.naukri.com

2.3 HIGHER STUDIES

M.Tech

Confidence and competence to work in International environment

As students are the future leaders, the Responsibility, Accountability and

exhibiting the leadership skills should start from the first year of engineering.

Every student is advised to read / practice from the following books;

Verbal and Nonverbal by RS Agarwal

Baron GRE

Wren and Martin English Grammer Book

2.2 IMPORTANT CRITERIA OF EMPLOYMENT

In addition to the industry grade skills required for employment, the most

The Graduate Aptitude Test in Engineering (GATE) is an all-India examination

administered and conducted in eight zones across the country by the GATE

Committee comprising faculty from Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore and

seven Indian Institutes of Technology on behalf of the National Coordinating

Board - GATE, Department of Education, Ministry of Human Resources

Development (MHRD), and Government of India.

Objective

To identify meritorious and motivated candidates for admission to Post Graduate

programmes in Engineering, Technology, Architecture and Pharmacy at the

National level. To serve as benchmark for normalization of the Undergraduate

Engineering Education in the country. This provides an opportunity for advanced

engineering education in India. An M.E or M.Tech degree is a desirable

qualification for our young engineers seeking a rewarding professional career.

Engineering students, while in the final year of their degree course, spend

http://www.freshersworld.com/

http://www.monster.com/

http://www.naukri.com/



considerable time in seeking an opening for studies in foreign universities. The

students are advised to pursue M.Tech in IIT’s/NIT’s/University Colleges.

MBA

Earning a Master’s of Business Administration (MBA) degree can provide you

with management skills and business expertise that open new career opportunities

to you. An MBA program will also launch you into the much higher pay range

that upper level managers and executives enjoy. Furthermore, in the high-level

positions, an MBA degree will allow you to hold and your work will often be

more interesting and rewarding. The students are advised to pursue M.BA in

IIM’s/XLRI/Reputed Business Schools.

HIGHER STUDIES ABROAD

TOEFL is mandatory for seeking admission in any academic course at any level-

undergraduate, graduate or post graduate, in USA and Canada. Similarly UK

Universities ask for IELTS for seeking admission to graduate and past graduate

courses.

GRE The Graduate Record Examination (GRE) is administered by the

Educational Testing Services (ETS) for admission into all graduate academic

programs (except management) in universities across USA and Canada and some

selected universities across the world including India. The exam is a Computer

Adaptive Test and is administered at any of the Sylvan testing centers in the

country after prior registration.

The GMAT is a Computer Adaptive Test administered online by Educational

Testing Services (ETS) through Sylvan testing centers located in all the major

cities in India. Those who wish to enroll for courses in Business Management in

American universities have to take the GMAT test and submit their scores to the

department.

VARIOUS SCHOLARSHIPS AVAILABLE IN INDIA

Bharat Petroleum Scholarship For Higher Studies | Balarama Digest Scholarship |

Central Institute of Indian Languages | Fair & Lovely Foundation - Project

Saraswati Scholarships | Government Of India Office of the Director General of

Civil Aviation Scholarship | Homi Bhabha Centre For Science Education Tata

Institute of Fundamental Research Research Scholarships | HSBC Scholarships |

Indian Council Of Agricultural Research Award Of National Talent Scholarship

In Agriculture | Indian Institute Of Geomagnetism Research Scholars | Invention

Awards For School Children | Indian Oil Corporation Ltd (IOCL) - Scholarships |

Jawaharlal Nehru Memorial Fund Jawaharlal Nehru Scholarships For Doctoral

Studies | Junior Research Scholarships For Cancer Biology Tata Memorial Centre

& Tata Memorial Hospital | Jaigopal Garodia Vivekananda Trust Scholarships |

Lalit Kala Akademi - Scholarship | Mahindra All India Talent Scholarships For

Diploma courses In Polytechnics | National Brain Research Centre Scholarships |

NTPC Scholarships | National Institute Of Science Communication And

Information Resources(NISCAIR) | National Olympiad Programme | National

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/bharathpetroleum.htm


http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/central2.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/Fair%20%26%20Lovely%20Foundation%20-%20Project%20Saraswati%202005-06%20Scholarships.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/Fair%20%26%20Lovely%20Foundation%20-%20Project%20Saraswati%202005-06%20Scholarships.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/civil.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/civil.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/homibhabha.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/homibhabha.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/hsbc.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/aeea.htm



http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/csiraward.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/csiraward.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/indianoil1.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/jawaharlal2.htm



http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/tatamemorial.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/tatamemorial.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/lalitkala.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/lalitkala.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/mahindra_all_india-talent-scholarship_for-diploma_courses.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/nbrc.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/ntpcscholarships.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/niscair.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/niscair.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/olympaid.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/unified.htm



Level Science Talent Search Examination - 2005 | Narotam Sekhsaria

Scholarship Programme | National Brain Research Centre Scholarships, Post

Doctoral Fellowships | National Aptitude Test | NIIT National IT Aptitude Test |

Oil And Natural Gas Corporation Ltd (ONGC) Scholarships To SC/ST Students |

Office Of The Director General of Civil Aviation Scholarships Stipend to the

SC/ST Candidates | Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan - Scholarships | Scholarships To

Young Artistes | Saf-Madanjeet Singh Scholarship | Sports Authority Of India -

Sports Scholarships | SAF-Madanjeet Singh Scholarship | Spic Macay

Scholarships | The Childrens Foundation - Scholarships | The L&T Build-India

Scholarship | The Hindu-Hitachi Scholarships | The Paul Foundation

Scholarships | Technology Information Forecsting and Assessment

Council(TIFAC) Women Scientist Scholarship Scheme | The Young Talent IT

Scholarship The Dr.GB Scholarships Foundation |

VARIOUS INTERNATIONAL SCHOLARSHIPS AVAILABLE IN INDIA

2. www.highereducationinindia.com

A * STAR India Youth Scholarship | A.M.M. Arunachalam-Lakshmi Achi Scholarship For Overseas Study | British Chevening Scholarships | Bharat

Petroleum - Scholarships for Higher Studies | Cambridge Nehru Scholarships |

Commonwealth Scholarship and Fellowship | Czech Government Scholarship |

Chevening Technology Enterprise Scholarship Programme | Chinese Government

Scholarship | Greek Government Scholarships | Israel Government Scholarship |

Iranian Government Scholarship | Offer of Italian Government Scholarship |

Japanese Government Scholarships | K.C.Mahindra Scholarships For Post-

Graduate Studies Abroad | Lady Meherbai D.Tata Scholarships | Mexican

Government Scholarship | Norwegian Government Scholarships | National

Overseas Scholarships/Passage Grant for ST Candidates | Portuguese Government

Scholarships | Sophia Merit Scholarships Inc | Slovak Government Scholarship |

SIA Youth Scholarships | The Rhodes Scholarships India | The Ramakrishna

Mission Institute Of Culture Award of Debesh-Kamal Scholarships For Studies

Abroad | The Inlaks Foundation - Scholarships |

Website for Higher Studies:

1. www.higherstudyabroad.org

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/unified.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/narotam.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/narotam.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/nbrc1.htm



http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/niit.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/niit.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/ongc.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/civil1.htm



http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/youngartistes.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/youngartistes.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/saf.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/Sports_Authority_Of_India_Scholarship.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/Sports_Authority_Of_India_Scholarship.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/safmadanjeet.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/spicmacay.htm



http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/larsen.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/larsen.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/hindu-hitachi.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/paul.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/paul.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/womenscientist.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/womenscientist.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/kgisi.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/kgisi.htm

http://www.highereducationinindia.com/

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/astarindiayouthscholarship.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/amm.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/amm.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/chevening1.htm



http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/cambridge.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/commonwealth1.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/czech.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/chevening.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/chinese.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/chinese.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/greek1.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/israel.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/iranian.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/italian.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/japanesescholarships.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/mahindra1.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/mahindra1.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/ladymeherbai.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/mexicanscholarships.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/mexicanscholarships.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/norwegian.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/tribal.htm



http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/portuguese.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/sophia.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/sophia.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/siayouthscholarship2006.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/rhodes_Scholarships_india_2006.htm

http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/debesh.htm



http://www.freshersworld.com/scholarship/inlaks1.htm

http://www.higherstudyabroad.org/



3. STUDENT CAREER ORIENTED PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION COURSES

As per the career plan for students of MLR Institute of Technology with a view to

bridge the gap between Industry and Academia, it has been planned to equip every

student with at least three International / National certification by the time he / she

completes the course of study. The details of the certification courses are given below:

Branch

Year

Name of the Certification Course

Computer Science and

Engineering / IT / MCA

2nd

Year Certificate Information Technology

3rd

Year IBM Certified DB2 Database

Associate, Infosys Campus Connect

4th

Year IBM Certified Rational Application

Developer

4th

Year SUN Certified Java Programmer

Electronics and Communication

Engineering

2nd

Year Institute of Electronics and

Telecommunication Engineering

3rd

Year Motorola @ CAMPUS

4th

Year IBM Certified DB2 Database

Associate

Aeronautical Engineering

2nd

Year Certificate in AutoCAD

3rd

Year Certificate in HighPerMesh

4th

Year Certificate in CATIA

Mechanical Engineering

2nd

Year Certificate in AutoCAD

3rd

Year Certificate in HighPerMesh

4th

Year Certificate in CATIA

3.1 Help Desk

The college has set up a Help Desk for Career Guidance and overseas education.

The aim of the Help Desk is to provide a flatform for the students to choose the Right

Destination. The students can reach the Help Desk in person or through mail at email

id [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]



4. PERFORMANCE MONITORING AND GUIDANCE

4.1 STUDENT FEEDBACK

In case the students find it difficult to cope up / understand a particular subject,

they are

advised to discuss it with

a. The Concerned Teacher

b. The Class Teacher

c. The Department Head

d. The Principal

Students can use the suggestion boxes for communicating feedback. Students

Two students from each class are selected as the Class Representatives from the

department basing on their academic performance and discipline. Department

Head makes the selections.

Responsibilities of the Class Representatives:

Collection of MIS format from Class Teacher daily.

Communicating the departmental / college directives & information to

the students.

Collecting the feedback of difficulties faced by the students and

communicating Suggestions for improvements.

Coordinating academic events and co-curricular activities.

should mention their names so that they can be informed of the progress / more

details / clarifications can be obtained.

4.2 CLASS TEACHER

Every class is assigned a Class Teacher (a faculty member). Students can

directly discuss their college related or personal problems related to studies with

them. The Class Teachers are accessible to the students and they can talk to the

Class Teacher or whenever they are free from class / lab work. Class Teacher

will meet with the class representative on daily basis to discuss their day-to-day

difficulties if any.

4.3 CLASS REPRESENTATIVES AND THEIR ROLES



Encourage students to interact for better studies, sharing books and

notes.

Compilation and submission of MIS form to class teacher at the end of

the period.

PERFORMANCE COUNSELING

Mentors will evaluate the student individually for the following:

a. Less marks in internal exams

b. Continuous absence (3 days) and shortage of attendance

c. Not understanding the subject

d. Students from Telugu medium

with material and important questions are discussed.

4.7 CORRESPONDENCE WITH PARENTS

Parents will be informed about the performance of their ward from time to time

in the semester. However parents are requested to be in touch with the Student

mentor / Department Head on a regular basis.

e. Assistance for back log subjects etc.

f. Communication with parents

g. Provide help to back log students

REMEDIAL CLASSES / TUTORIAL / REVISIONS

Remedial Classes are conducted for students who are weak and who do not

perform well in their internal examinations / class tests or for the students who

want extra help. Slots in the time table have been reserved for Tutorial where in

the students are helped to solve the question in the class itself.

BACKLOG MANAGEMENT

The Mentors maintain a complete record of Examination results of each student

and they counsel and guide them in preparing for backlogs. Students are provided



5. RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR STUDENTS

ADMINISTRATIVE

1. Students, admitted into this College, are deemed to have agreed to the rules

and regulations of the college, as laid down by the College Authorities from

time to time, and the rules lay down in this leaflet, issued at the time of

admission.

2. Students should inform any changes in the addresses/Phone No. of their

parents / guardians to the college office.

3. The college shall communicate to the parents \ guardians of the students

from time to time regarding the regularity and performance in the

examinations of their wards. The case of serious indiscipline on the part of

the students (s) may also be communicated to parent (s) \ guardian (s).

ACADEMIC

1. Students should attend the classes in - time. Late- comers shall not be

permitted to enter the class room and they are likely to loose the

attendance.

2. Students are expected to be regular to the classes. The students Shall not

absent themselves for classes without prior approval. Prior permission

shall be taken from concerned counselor and submitted to the Head of the

Department.

3. In case of ill-health, the student should submit the medical certificate

along with prescription, etc., from a registered medical doctor. The student

should get the medical certificate within two days from the date of reporting

to the college after iII health and also produce a letter from Father/

Mother regarding ill-health. Permission on medical grounds shall not be

granted for one or two days.

4. The students should come to the laboratories with the prescribed uniform.

5. If a student disturbs the class or makes mischief, he / she will be marked

absent and may be expelled from the class.

6. Students shall spend their leisure time in the library/computer center.

7. Students are expected to put up the minimum aggregate percentage of

attendance (75%) as laid down by the JNT University. Students, falling

short of 75% of attendance shall not be promoted to the next Semester \

Class.

8. Parents \ guardians of the students can contact the college authorities either

in person or by post regarding discipline, regularity in attending classes,

performance in the examinations, etc., of their wards.



DRESS CODE

1. Students are expected to attend the college properly dressed. They should

wear the prescribed uniform while attending laboratory classes.

2. Students are expected to carry the identity cards, issued by the college, in

the campus. They are required to show the identity cards at the library,

computer center, office, etc. Students without Identity Cards are not allowed

in to the laboratory classes.

DISCIPLINE & PUNCTUALITY

3. No student shall enter or leave the class room without the permission of the

teacher.

4. Calling students out of their class rooms while the lecture is in progress is

prohibited.

5. Students are required to help in keeping the rooms, buildings, and premises

clean and tidy. Writing or sticking up of posters and notices on the walls is

strictly prohibited.

6. Smoking, Consumption of alcohol, intoxicating drinks or drugs is strictly

prohibited in and around the college premises. Those indulging in such

activities will be put severely or expelled.

7. Students are expected to behave well with the staff, other students and the

general public. Any misbehavior, coming to the notice of the college

authorities, will be severely dealt with.

8. The conduct of the students should be exemplary not only within the

premises of the college but also outside. This will help in maintaining the

image and status of the college.

9. Students are required to observe silence at all times in the college campus.

They shall not talk in loud tone or call each other by shouting.

10. Students are prohibited from loitering in the verandahs / campus during

class hours, and sitting on the steps, stair-cases or parapet walls.

11. Students are not permitted to resort to strikes and demonstrations within the

campus. Participation in such activity entails their dismissal from the

college. Any problem they face may be represented to the Counselor / Head

of the Department / Principal.

12. Students are prohibited carrying Cell Phones and organizing any meeting or

entertainment in the college campus without the permission of the college

authorities.

13. The entry of outsiders without permission is prohibited. Any student found

responsible for bringing outsiders into the campus for settling personal

disputes with other students, shall be expelled from the college.

14. The college is entitled to take any disciplinary action, which is deemed

necessary in the case of any indiscipline on the part of the students. The



same will be reflected on the Conduct Certificate issued at the time of

leaving the college.

15. No Student Unions, except Professional Associations, are permitted in the

college.

16. If the students cause any damage to the college property knowingly or

unknowingly individually or in a group they have to pay 5 times to cost of

property damaged them. All the students are collectively responsible for the

proper maintenance college property i.e. building, furniture, lab equipment,

garden, playgrounds, etc., recovery, calculated on semester to semester

basis, will be collected along with examination fee for the semester.

17. Students should keep their vehicles only at the parking place allotted for the

purpose. Vehicle riding in the campus is strictly prohibited.

18. Sitting on the parapet wall and Riding beyond the parking limits, the fine

will be imposed to Rs.100.00

19. Breakage or loss of equipment /property as decided by the appropriate

authority The Principal/Director may, on the recommendation of the Head

of the Department, or otherwise, inflict the following punishments in the

interests of the student discipline and the Institution: fined, curtailment

attendance, denial of promotion to next semester, suspension, expulsion or

such other action as deemed necessary for the maintenance of discipline in

the campus.

5.5. LAB CLASSES

All students must attend lab classes without fail. Those absent shall follow this

procedure laid down in the prescribed format explaining valid reasons and

obtain permission to attend the future classes.

FEE

1. All students admitted into this college, will be required to pay the prescribed

tuition fee and other specified fees. Failure of the same will result in the

cancellation of admission. No portion of fees will be refunded under any

circumstances. If any student wishes to change the college or discontinue the

course at any point for any reason, he \ she shall not be permitted to do so

unless he \ she pays balance amount of four years fees which he \ she would

have to pay, if he \she continued till the completion of the course. His \ Her

original certificates including I.e., etc., will be issued only after all the dues as

stated above, are cleared by the students. All senior students must pay the

college fee every year on or before the 15th

of July irrespective of the

reopening of the college. If they fail the fine will be imposed as per norms of

the management.

2. Miscellaneous fee paid for expenditure related to training programs i.e.,

technical or soft skills etc., is not refundable.

3. Other than the above, if any fees are levied by the University the student has to

be pay the same.



TRANSPORT

All students who are availing the college bus facility must carry the bus-pass

and must produce when demanded, failing which they will not allowed to travel

in the bus. All students must travel in the allotted bus and routes. They should

not change but occupy only their allotted seats throughout. Unauthorized

students caught in the bus for not having the bus pass, should pay even if they

traveled for one day also. First and second year are not allowed to bring two-

wheelers.

LIBRARY RULES

1. Library Books will be issued for 15 days time and renewal depends upon the

demand of the book.

2. Silence should be strictly maintained in the library.

3. Students are responsible for the library borrower card issued to them. Loss of

the library card should be reported in writing to the circulation section

immediately. Duplicate library borrower card will be issued on payment of

Rs.150/- after a week time from the date of application for duplicate cards.

4. The Library borrower card is not transferable.

5. Library books must be returned on or before the due date. Any student

failed to do so, 1st week –Rs.1/-per day/per book, 2

nd week – Rs.2/-per

day/per book and 3rd

week –Rs.3/-per day/per book penalty will be

imposed From 4th

week-Rs.5/-per day/per book penalty will be imposed.

6. Students shall not make any sort of conversation in any part of the library,

causing inconvenience to others.

7. Students shall not bring their belongings inside the library and should keep

them outside the library.

8. Students leaving from the library should be checked at the exit.

9. Tearing of pages/stealing of books will invite suspension from using of the

library facilities and further disciplinary action will be taken against such

students, as per college norms.

10. The borrower shall replace the New book within 7 days, otherwise, he/she

has to pay 3 times of the book cost, along with fine. In case of lose of book.

GENERAL

1. All the students admitted in this college have to give an undertaking to abide

by the rules and regulations of this college in prescribed format given by the

college.

2. All the students should attend the college after vacations (Dasara / Sankranthi

/ Christmas / Semester term / summer) on the re-opening day without fail.

3. Students must deposit all the relevant original certificates and documents

at the time of the admission Office and they will not be returned until



All Breakage etc., penalties will be displayed on the Notice Board, and must

be paid by the student and no student will be allowed to write examination or

internal test or laboratory test, if penalties are not paid by the due date

specified in the notice or circular.

5.10. RAGGING

Ragging in any form inside or outside the college campus is banned/Prohibited

vide Ragging Act 26 of AP. legislative Assembly 1997. Those who indulge in

this uncivilized activity are liable for severe disciplinary actions besides being

liable for prosecution.

SALIENT FEATURES

Ragging means doing an act which causes or is likely to cause insult 'or annoyance or

fear or apprehension or threat or intimidation or outrage of modesty or injury to a

student.

completion of the course.

4. Admission of any student can be cancelled by the Management at any point

during the course for reasons which are not in consonance with the rules and

regulations and which are detrin the reputation of the college.

5. All the Students are here by informed that college authorities will not take

any responsibility for loss or theft of your valuable items and money kept

in your bags or some where else. Hence I request all the students are not to

keep your valuables in class room or anywhere without your presence.

6. Fee For Issue Of Duplicates

a) Duplicate Hall ticket Rs. 100.00

b) Duplicate Identity Card Rs. 100.00

c) Duplicate College Bus Pass Rs. 50.00

d) Duplicate Study Certificate for same purpose Rs. 50.00

e) Xerox copies of OD’s Rs. 50.00

S.No. Nature of Ragging Punishment

1 Teasing, Embarrassing and

Humiliating

Imprisonment Upto 6 Month

or Fine Upto Rs 1000/- or Both.

2 Assaulting or using criminal Force or criminal intimidation

Imprisonment Upto 1 Year or Fine Upto Rs 2000/- or Both.

3 Wrongfully restraining or Confining

or causing hurt

Imprisonment Upto 2 Years or

Fine Upto Rs 5000/- or Both.

4 Causing grievous hurt kidnapping Or

raping or committing unnatural offence

Imprisonment Upto 5 Years or

Fine Upto Rs 10000/- or Both

5 Causing death or abating Suicide Imprisonment Upto 10 Years or fine Upto Rs. 50000/- or Both



Note:

1. A student convicted of any of the above offences, will be, dismissed from the

college.

2. A student imprisoned for more than six months for any of the above offences

'will not be admitted inany other College.

3. A student against whom there is prima facie evidence of ragging in any form

will be suspended from the college immediately.

Prohibition of Ragging

1.Ragging is prohibited as per act 26 of AP. Legislative assembly, 1997.

2.Ragging entails heavy fines and/or imprisonment.

3. Ragging invokes suspension and dismissal from the college.

4. Outsiders are prohibited from entering the college premises without permission.

5.All students must carry their identity cards and show them when Demanded.

6. The principal and staff will visit and inspect the rooms at any time.

7. Suspended students are debarred from entering the campus except when required to

attend enquiry and to submit an explanation .



6.ACADEMIC REGULATIONS R13 FOR B.TECH.

(REGULAR)

(Effective for the students admitted into I year from the Academic Year 2013-

14 onwards)

AWARD OF B.TECH. DEGREE

A Student will be declared eligible for the award of the B.Tech. Degree if he

fulfills the following academic regulations:

i) Pursued a course of study for not less than four academic years and not

more than eight academic years.

ii) Register for 200 credits and secure 200 credits.

iii) The candidate shall register for 224 credits and secure 216 credits with compulsory

subjects as listed in Table-1.

Table 1: Compulsory Subjects

Serial Number Subject Particulars

1 All practical subjects

2 Industry oriented mini project

3 Comprehensive Viva-Voce

4 Seminar

5 Project work

Students, who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the

degree within eight academic years from the year of their admission, shall forfeit their seat in

B.Tech Course.

COURSES OF STUDY

The following courses of study are offered at present as speciliaztions for the

B.Tech courses.

B ranch Code Branch

01 Civil Engineering

02 Electrical and Electronics Engineering

03 Mechanical Engineering

04 Electronics and Communication Engineering

05 Computer Science Engineering

08 Chemical Engineering

10 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

12 Information Technology

14 Mechanical Engineering (Mechatronics)

17 Electronics and Telematics Engineering

18 Metallurgy and Material Engineering

19 Electronics and Computer Engineering

20 Mechanical Engineering (Productions)



21 Aeronautical Engineering

22 Instrumentation and Control Engineering

23 Biotechnology

24 Automobile Engineering

25 Mining Engineering

26 Mining Machinery

27 Petroleum Engineering

28 Civil and Environmental Engineering

29 Mechanical Engineering (Nano Technology)

30 Agricultural Engineering

31 Computer Science & Technology

CREDITS

I Year Semester

Periods / Week Credits Periods / Week Credits

Theory 03+1/03 06 04 04 02 04 --- ---

Practical 03 04 03 02

Drawing 02+03 06 03 06

02 04

Mini Project --- ---- --- 02

Comprehensive Viva Voce

--- -- --- 02

Seminar --- --- 6 02

Project --- --- 15 10

DISTRIBUTION AND WEIGHT AGE OF MARKS

i. The performance of a student in each semester / I year shall be evaluated

subject – wise with a maximum of 100 marks for theory and 75 marks

for practical subject. In addition, Industry oriented mini-project, seminar

and project work shall be evaluated for 50,50 and 200 marks

respectively.

ii. For theory subjects the distribution shall be 25 marks for Internal

Evaluation and 75 marks for the End-Examination.

iii. For theory subjects, during the semester there shall be 2 midterm

examinations. Each mid term examintin consists of one objective paper,

one essay paper and one assignment. The objective paper and the

minutes (20 minutes for objective and 60 minutes for essay paper). The

Objective paper is set with 20 bits of multiple choice, fill in the blanks

and matchinjg type of questions for a total of 10 marks. The essay paper

shall contain 4 full questions (one from each unit) out of which, the

student has to answer 2 questions, each carrying 5 marks. While the first

mid-term examination shall be conducted on 1 to 2.5 units of the

syllabus, the second mid-term examination shall be conducted on 2.5 to



5 units. Five (5) marks are allocated for Assignements (as specified by

the subject teacher concerned). The first Assignment should be

submitted before the conduct of the fiest mid-examination, and the

second Assignment should be submitted before the conduct of the

second mid-examination. The total marks secured by the student in each

mid-term examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the average of

the two mid-term examinations shall be taken as the final marks secured

by each candidate. However, in the I year, there shall be 3 mid term

examination, each for 25 marks, along with 3 assignments in a similar

pattern as above (Ist mid shall be from Unit- I, 2nd

mid shall be 2 & 3

Units and 3rd

mid shall be 4 & 5 Units) and the average marks of the

examinations secured (each evaluated for a total of 25 marks) in each

subject shall be considred to be final marks for the internals/sessionals.

If any candidate is absent from any subject of a mid-term examination,

an on-line test will be conducted for him by the University.

The details of the Question Paper pattern wihtou deviating from the

R13 regulations as notified in the webiste is as follows:

o The End semesters Examination will be conducted for 75 marks which consists of two parts viz i) Part – A for 25 marks, ii) Part-B for 50 marks.

o Part-A is compulsory question which consists of ten sub-

questions. The first five subquestions are from each unit and

carries 2 marks each. The next five sub-questions are one from

each unit and carriers 3 marks each.

o Part-B consists of five questions (numbered from 2 to 6)

carrying 10 marks each. Each of these questions is from one

unit and may contain sub-questions. For each question there

will be an “either’ “or” choice (that means there will be two

questions from each unit and the student should answer any

one question)

iv. For practical subjects there shall be a continuous evaluation during the

semester for 25 sessional marks and 50 end examination marks. Out of

the 25 marks for internal, day-to-day work in the laboratory shall be

evaluated for 15 marks and internal examination for practical shall be

evaluated for 10 marks conducted by the concerned laboratory teacher.

The end examination shall be conducted with external examiner and

laboratory teacher. The external examiner shall be appointed from the

cluster of colleges as decided by the University examination branch.

v. For the subject having design and / or drawing, (such as Engineering

Graphics, Engineering Drawing, Machine Drawing) and estimation, the

distribution shall be 25 marks for internal evaluation (15 marks for day-

to-day work and 10 marks for internal tests) and 75 marks for end

examination. There shall be two internal tests in a Semester and the

better of the two shall be considered for the award of marks for internal



tests. However in the I year class, there shall be three tests and the

average of best two will be taken into consideration.

vi. There shall be an industry-oriented mini-project, in collaboration with

an industry of their specialization, to be taken up during the vacation

after III year II semester examination. However, the mini project and its

report shall be evaluated with the project shall be submitted in report

form and should be presented before the committee, which shall be

evaluated for 50 marks. The committee consists of an external examiner,

head of the department, the supervisor of mini project and a senior

faculty member of the department. There shall be no internal marks for

industry oriented mini project.

vii. There shall be a seminar presentation in IV year II semester. For the

seminar, the student shall collect the information on a specialized topic

and prepare a technical report, showing his understanding over the topic,

and submit to the department, which shall be evaluated by the

Departmental committee consisting of Head of the department, seminar

supervisor and a senior faculty member. The seminar report shall be

evaluated for 50 marks. There shall be no external examination for

seminar.

viii. There shall be a comprehensive Viva-Voce in IV year II semester. The

Comprehensive Viva-Voce will be conducted by a Committee

consisting of (i) Head of the Department (ii) two Senior Faculty

members of the Department. The comprehensive Viva-Voce is aimed to

assess the students’ understanding in various subjects he/she studied

during the B.Tech course of study. The comprehensive Viva-Voce is

evaluated for 100 marks by the Committee. There are no internal marks

for the comprehensive viva-voce.

ix. Out of a total of 200 marks for the project work, 50 marks shall be for

Internal Evaluation and 150 marks for the End Semester Examination.

The End semester Examination (viva-voce) shall be conducted by the

same committee appointed for industry oriented mini project. In addition

the project supervisor shall also be included in the committee. The

topics for industry oriented mini project, seminar and project work shall

be conducted at the end of the IV year. The Internal Evaluation shall be

on the basis of two seminars given by each student on the topic of his

project.

x. Laboratory marks and the sessional marks awarded by the college are

not final. They are subject to scrutiny and scaling by the University

wherever necessary. In such cases, the sessional and laboratory marks

awarded by the College will be referred to a Committee. The Committee

will arrive at a scaling factor and the marks will be scaled as per the

scaling factor. The recommendations of the Committee are final and

binding. The laboratory records and internal test papers shall be

preserved in the respective institutions as per the University norms and

shall be produced to the Committees of the University as and when the

same is asked for.



ATTENDANCE REQUIREMENTS:

i. A student shall be eligible to appear for University examinations if he

acquires a minimum of 75% of attendance in aggregate of all the subjects.

ii. Shortage of Attendance below 65% in aggregate shall in NO case be

condoned.

iii. Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and

above and below 75%) in each semester or I year may be granted by the

College Academic Committee.

iv. A student will not be promoted to the next semester unless he satisfies the

attendance requirement of the present semester / I year, as applicable. They

may seek re-admission for that semester / I year when offered next.

v. Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / I

year are not eligible to take their end examination of that class and their

registration shall stand cancelled.

vi. A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation of shortage of

attendance.

MINIMUM ACADEMIC REQUIREMENTS:

The following academic requirements have to be satisfied in addition to the

attendance requirements mentioned in item no.6

i.A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the minimum academic

requirements and earned the credits allotted to each theory or practical

design or drawing subject or project if he secures not less than 35% of

marks in the end examination and a minimum of 40% of marks in the sum

total of the internal evaluation and end examination taken together.

ii. A student shall be promoted from II to III year only if he fulfills the

academic requirement of 37 credits from one regular and one

supplementary examinations of I year, and one regular examination of II

year I semester irrespective of whether the candidate takes the examination

or not.

iii. A student shall be promoted from third year to fourth year only if he fulfills

the academic requirements of total 62 credits from the following

examinations, whether the candidate takes the examinations or not.

a) Two regular and two supplementary examinations of I year.

b) Two regular and one supplementary examinations of I semester.

c) One regular and one supplementary examinations of II year II semester.

d) One regular examination of III year I Semester.

iv. A student shall register and put up minimum attendance in all 200 credits

and earn the 200 credits. Marks obtained in all 200 credits shall be

considered for the calculation of percentage of marks.

v. Students who fail to earn 200 credits as indicated in the course structure

within eight academic years from the year of their admission shall forfeit

their seat in B.Tech course and their admission shall stand cancelled.



7.0 COURSE CALENDAR FOR THE YEAR

Description Period Duration

I Sem

Commencement of Classwork 18-07-2017

1st Spell of Instructions 18-07-2017 06-08-2017 (8 weeks)

I mid term exams 08-09-2017 13-08-2017 (1 week)

2nd

Spell of Instructions 16-08-2017 10-11-2017 (8 weeks)

II mid term exams 13-11-2017 20-11-2017 (1 weeks)

Preparations & Practical

Examinations 09-11-2017 14-11-2017 (1 weeks)

End Examinations 25-11-2017 15-12-2017 (2 weeks)

II Sem

Commencement of Classwork 18-12-2017

1st Spell of Instructions 19-12-2017 30-12-2017 (8 weeks)

I mid term exams 19-02-2018 24-02-2018 (1 week)

2nd

Spell of Instructions 26-02-2018 21-04-2018 (8 weeks)

II mid term exams 23-04-2018 28-04-2018 (1 weeks)

Preparations & Practical

Examinations 30-04-2018 05-05-2018 (1 weeks)

End Examinations 07-05-2018 19-05-2018 (2 weeks)



Note: All End Examinations (Theory and Practical) are of three hours duration.

T – Tutorial L-Theory P- Practical C – Credit

8.0 IV YEAR MECH COURSE STRUCTURE

CODE

SUBJECT

L

T/P/D

C

A62405 Automobile Engineering 4 - 4

A60330 Engineering Metrology 4 -

4

A60334 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 4 -

4

A60331 Heat Transfer 4 -

4

A12125 Non destructive testing Methods 4 -

3

A60387 Heat Transfer Lab - 3 2

A60086 Advanced English Communication Skills Lab - 3 2

Total 20 6 23



9. AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING (A62405)

9.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Code A62405

Course Title AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

Course Structure Lectures Tutorials Practicals Credits

5 1 - 4

Course Coordinator Dr.Karthikeyan, Professor

Team of Instructors Mr.M.VBabu,Assistant Professor Mr.M.Anil Kumar,Assistant Professor

9.2 COURSE OVERVIEW:

This course is intended to introduce structural and operational details of automobile and its systems. Major

systems are fuel supply, cooling, ignition, electrical, transmission, suspension, braking and steering.

Transport of personnel and goods play an important roll in the economy of country and standard of living.

Lakhs of vehicles running crosses of kilometers. So the man power is required to manufacture and

maintain all these vehicles. After completion of this course the student’s gains adequate knowledge either

to work in manufacturing or maintenance sector of automobiles.

9.3 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Week

s

Prerequisites

UG

4

4

Mechanicsofsolids,Fluidmechanics,Heat

transfer,Thermodynamics, Applied thermodynamics, Kinematics

of Machinery, dynamics of a machinery basic electrical

Engineering, Machine Design.

9.4 COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS:

a) Marks Distributions (Traditional Evaluation methods)

Session Marks (25M) University End

Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests): There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm examination

consists of one objective paper, one subjective paper and four

assignments. The objective paper is for 10 marks and subjective paper

is for 10 marks, with duration of 1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for

objective and 60 minutes for subjective paper). Objective paper is set

for 20 bits of – multiple choice questions, fill-in the blanks, 10 marks.

Subjective paper contains of 4 full questions (one from each unit) of

which, the student has to answer 2 questions, each question carrying 5

marks. First midterm examination shall be conducted for 2.5 units of

syllabus and second midterm examination shall be conducted for

another 2.5 units. 5 marks are allocated for Assignments. First two

assignments should be submitted before the

75

100



conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments should be

submitted before the conduct of the second mid. The total marks

secured by the student in each midterm examination are evaluated for

25 marks, and the average of the two midterm examinations shall be

taken as the final marks secured by each candidate.

b) 9.5 Expected Learning Outcomes and Methods for Assessing

S.No Expected Learning Outcomes Assessment Method (s)

a The student will be able to understand the different forces acting on machines.

Assignments, Quiz, Midterm and University exams

b

The student will be able to understand the effect of the gyroscopic and centrifugal couples for the design of bearings.

Case studies of Gyroscopes, Assignments, Midterm and

University exams

c The student will be able to calculate forces and

analyze for the design of machine components. Group Activity problem solving

(GATE Level), Midterm and

University exams

d

The student will be able to design and analyze the

machines considering friction, vibrations and

balancing properly.

Group Activity problem solving

(GATE Level), Midterm and

University exams

e The student will be able to decide and plan to

create a machine that competes with the other

manufacturers.

Group Activity problem solving

(GATE Level), Assignments,

Midterm and University exams

9.6 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

2 I Assignment 5

3 II Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

4 II Assignment 5

MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2 MID’s

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

Total 75



9.7 COURSE OBJECTIVES VS COURSE OUTCOMES WITH BLOOMS:

S. No Course Objectives

(The students will be able to)

Course Outcomes

(The students are able to)

Blooms Level

1

I) Understand the layout of automobiles,fuel and lubrication systems in C.I and S.I engines.

a) Understand the concepts

on working principles of

various systems in

automobiles.

BL 1 & 2

2

II) Discuss the mechanical details and

working principles of cooling,ignition and

electrical systems in an automobile.

b) Classify various cooling

systems and discuss the

functions of ignition and

electrical systems in

automobiles.

BL 2 & 3

3

III) Analyze the working of transmission and suspension systems in an automobile.

c) Analyze various

transmission systems and

drive line units of

automobiles.

BL 4

4

IV) Gain

considerations

systems.

knowledge

in braking

of

and

design

steering

d) Specify design

considerations in Braking

and Steering systems.

BL 1 & 6

5

V) Analyze various emissions from

automobiles and evaluate their effect on

environment.

e) Design an automobile

which can run on

alternative fuels duly by

reducing emission levels

for achieving eco-friendly

environment.

BL 4, 5 & 6

BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

BL 1: Remember / knowledge BL2: Understanding BL3: Apply

BL 4: Analyze BL 5: Evaluate BL 6: Create



9.8 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level

Proficiency

assessed by

Blooms

Taxonomy

A

Graduates will demonstrate the ability to use basic

knowledge in mathematics, science and

engineering and apply them to solve problems

specific to Mechanical Engineering

(Fundamental engineering analysis skills).

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

Understand

B

Graduates will demonstrate the ability to design

and conduct experiments, interpret and analyze

data, and report results (Information retrieval

skills).

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

Examinations

Evaluate

C

Graduates will demonstrate the ability to design

any mechanical systems that meets desired

specifications and requirements (Creative skills).

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

Analyze

D

Graduates will demonstrate the ability to function

as a coherent unit in multidisciplinary design

teams, and deliver results through collaborative

research (Teamwork).

S

Mini projects

Apply

E

Graduates will demonstrate the ability to identify,

formulate and solve mechanical engineering

problems of a complex kind (Engineering

problem solving skills).

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

Analysis

F

Graduates will demonstrate an understanding of

their professional and ethical responsibilities, and

use technology for the benefit of mankind

(Professional integrity).

N

--

---

G

Graduates will be able to communicate effectively

in both verbal and written forms (Speaking /

writing skills).

S Examinations,

projects

Remember

H

Graduates will have the confidence to apply engineering solutions in global and national

contexts (Engineering impact assessment skills).

S

--

Understand

I

Graduates should be capable of self-education and

clearly understand the value of life-long learning

(Continuing education awareness).

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

Examinations

Evaluate

J

Graduates will develop an open mind and have an

understanding of the impact of engineering on

society and demonstrate awareness of

contemporary issues (Social awareness).

N

--

--

K

Graduates will be familiar with applying software

methods and modern computer tools to analyze

mechanical engineering problems (Software

hardware interface).

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

Analyze



N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

SYLLABUS:

AUTOMOBILE ENIGNEERING

UNIT — I

Introduction : Layout of automobile — introduction chassis and body components . types of

Automobile engines. — power unit — Introduction to engine lubrication — engine servicing.

Fuel System :S.I. Engine : Fuel supply systems, Mechanical and electrical fuel pump — filters —

carburetor — types — air filters — petrol injection. Introductionto MPFI and GDI Systems.

L

Graduates will have the ability to recognize the

importance of professional development by

pursing post graduate studies or face competitive

examinations that offer challenging and rewarding

careers in Mechanical Engineering (Successful

career and immediate employment).

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

Understand

M

Students will be able to design a system to meet

desired needs within environmental, economic,

political, ethical health and safety,

manufacturability and management knowledge

and techniques to estimate time, resources to

complete project (Practical engineering

analysis skills)

S

Mini projects

Create

N

Students will be able to work professionally in

both thermal and mechanical systems areas.

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

Evaluate,

Create

C.I. Engines: Requirements of diesel injection systems, types of injection systems, DI Systems IDI

systems fuel pump, nozzle, spray formation injection timing, testing of fuel pumps Introduction CRDI

and TDI Systems.

UNIT—II

Cooling System : Cooling Requirements, Air Cooling, Liquid Cooling, Thermo, water and Forced

Circulation System — Radiators — Types — Cooling Fan - water pump, thermostat, evaporative cooling

— pressure sealed cooling—antifreeze solutions.

Ignition System :Function of an ignition system, battery ignition system, constructional features of

storage, battery, auto transformer, contact breaker points, condenser and spark plug — Magneto coil

ignition system, electronic ignition system using contact breaker, electronic ignition using contact

triggers—spark advance and retard mechanism.



Electrical System : Charging circuit, generator, current — voltage regulator starting system, bendix drive

mechanism solenoid switch, lighting systems, Horn, wiper, fuel gauge — oil pressure gauge, engine

temperature indicator etc.

UNIT — Ill

Transmission System :Clutches, principle, types, cone clutch, single plate clutch, multi plate clutch,

magnetic and centrifugal clutches, fluid fly wheel —gear boxes, types, sliding mesh, constantt mesh,

synchro mesh gear boxes, epicyclic gear box , over drive torque converter. Propeller shaft — Hotch —

Kiss drive, Torque tube drive, universal joint, differential rear axles — types —wheels and tyres.

Suspension System :Objects of suspension systems — rigid axle suspension system, torsion bar, shock

absorber, Independent suspension system.

UNIT — IV

Braking System :Mechanical brake system, Hydraulic brake system, Master cylinder, wheel cylinder

tandem master cylinder Requirement of brake fluid, pneumatic and vacuum brakes.

Steering System :Steering geometry — camber, castor, king pin rake, combined angle toein, center point

steering. Types of steering mechanism —Ackerman steering mechanism, Davis steering mechanism,

steering gears — types, steering linkages.

UNIT — V

Emissions from Automobiles — Pollution standards National and international — Pollution Control —

Techniques — Multipoint fuel injection for SI Engines. Common rail diesel injection Energy alternatives

— Solar, Photo-voltaic, hydrogen, Biomass, alcohols, LPG,CNG, liquid Fuels and gaseous fuels,

Hydrogen as a fuel for IC Engines. - Their merits and demerits.

TEXT BOOKS:

T1 Automobile Engineering / Dr.kirpal singh, standard publishers distributors vol-I.

T2 Automobile engineering / Dr.Kirpal singh, standard publishers distributors vol-2.

T3 Automobile Engineering / William Crouse, TMHill Publishers

T4 A Systems Approach to Automobile Technology, Jack Erjavec, YESSDEE Publishers Pvt Ltd., New

Delhi.

REFERENCES :

R1. Automotive Mechanics / G.B.S. Narang

R2. Automotive Mechanics / Heitner

R3. Automotive Engines / Srinivasan

R4. Automobile Engineering – K.K. Ramalingam / Scitech Publications (India) PVT. LTD. R5.

Automotive Engineering / Newton Steeds & Garrett



COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning Outcomes.

Lec

tur

e

No.

Course

Learning

Outcome

s

Le

vel

s

TOPICS TO BE COVERED

SESSION OBJECTIVES (At the

end of the session, the student will

be able to)

Reference

1

a,e

L1

Layout of automobile

introduction chassis and body

components

http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/1251

06002/

1. Understand the concept of

automobiles, layout of Chassis

T2 & R1 2. Design chassis and body

components

2

a,e

L2

types of Automobile engines

power unit


06002/

1.Classify various types of automobile engines

2.Analyze different components in

Power Unit

T2 & R1

3

a

L1

Introduction to engine

lubrication engine servicing


06002/

1.Demonstrate engine lubrication, engine servicing

2.Compare different types of engine

lubrication systems

T2 & R1

4

a

L1

Fuel System :S.I. Engine


06002/

1. Demonstrate Fuel system in S.I. engine

2.Explain the Fuel system in S.I. engine

T2 & R1

5

a

L1

Fuel supply systems

Mechanical and electrical fuel

pump


06002/

1.Compare various Fuel supply

systems

2.Specify the components in

mechanical and electrical fuel

pumps

T2 & R1

6

a

L4

Filters


06002/

1.Detect type of Fuel filters in

automobile engines

T2 & R1

2.Categorize various filters

7

a,b

L4

carburetor — types


06002/

1.Analyze the function of Carburetor T2 & R1

2. Categorize various Carburetors

8

a

L2

air filters petrol injection


06002/

1.Explain the working of Air filters T2 & R1 2.Differentiate Petrol injection

systems in various automobiles

9

a,b

L1

Introductionto MPFI and GDI

Systems


06002/

1. Compare MPFI and GDI

systems

T2 & R1 2.Explain the working of GDI

system

http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/125106002/




















10

a,b

L1

C.I. Engines :Requirements of

diesel injection systems


06002/

1. Examine the systems in C.I. Engines

T2 & R1 2. Analyze fuel supply systems in

C.I. Engines

11

a,b

L4

types of injection systems, DI

Systems IDI systems


06002/

1.Categorize various injection systems

T2 & R1 2.Compare different types of

injection systems

12

a,b

L1

fuel pump, nozzle, spray

formation


06002/

1.Understand the working of fuel pump

T2 & R1

2.Examine the spray formation in the engine cylinder

13

a,b

L2

injection timing, testing of fuel

pumps


06002/

1. Discuss the Injection timing

T2 & R1

2. Analyze the testing of fuel pumps

14

a

L1

Introduction CRDI and TDI

Systems


06002/

1. Compare CRDI and TDI systems

2.Explain the principle involved in

TDI systems

T2 & R1

15

a

L1

Cooling Requirements, Air

Cooling, Liquid Cooling


06002/

1. Generalize the Cooling

requirements for engines

2. Differentiate between the air

cooling and liquid cooling

T2 & R1

16

a

L4

Thermo, water and Forced

Circulation System


06002/

1.Understand the circulation system

2. Compare Thermo, water and

forced circulation system

T2 & R1

17

a,b

L4

Types — Cooling Fan - water

pump, thermostat


06002/

1.Categorize types of cooling

systems

2.Explain cooling systems

T2 & R1

18

a,b

L1

evaporative cooling — pressure

sealed cooling—antifreeze

solutions.


06002/

1. Compare the Evaporative cooling

and pressure sealed cooling

T2 & R1 2.Understand the importance of

antifreeze solutions.

19

b

L2

Ignition System :Function of an

ignition system, battery

ignition system,


06002/

1.Describe the function of an

ignition system

T2 & R1

2.Compare battery ignition system

and coil battery ignition system

20 b L1 constructional features of

storage, battery, auto

1.Discuss various components in

Electrical starting system T2 & R1























transformer, contact breaker

points, condenser


06002/

2.Explain the working of Contact

breaker mechanism

21

b

L1

spark plug — Magneto coil

ignition system,


06002/

1.Understand the working of Spark plug

T2 & R1 2.Discuss the working principle of

magneto coil ignition system

22

b

L4

electronic ignition system using

contact breaker


06002/

1.Explain the working Electronic

ignition system

T2 & R1 2. Explain the working Electronic

ignition system

23

b

L2

electronic ignition using

contact triggers—spark

advance and retard mechanism.


06002/

1. Explain the working Electronic

ignition system using contact

triggers

2. Discuss the principle involved in

retard mechanism

T2 & R1

24

b

L2

Electrical System : Charging

circuit, generator, current


06002/

1. Explain the working Electrical

ignition system

2.Discuss various components in the

Electrical ignition system

T2 & R1

25

b

L2

regulator starting system,

bendix drive mechanism

solenoid switch


06002/

1. Describe the principle of bendix

drive mechanism

2.Discuss the importance of solenoid

switch in the Electrical system

T2 & R1

26

b,c

L2

lighting systems, Horn, wiper,


06002/

1. Understand Lighting systems

2. Explain the working mechanism of horn, wiper

T2 & R1

27

c

L4

oil pressure gauge, engine

temperature indicator etc.


06002/

1. Explain types of Oil pressure

gauges

T2 & R1

2. Discuss the importance of engine temperature indicator

28

c

L4

Transmission System :Clutches, principle, types,

cone clutch,


06002/

1. Describe the working of Transmission system

T2 & R1

2. Classify various types of clutches

29

c

L2

Transmission System types,

cone clutch,


06002/

1. Understand the working of

Transmission system

T2 & R1 2. Discuss the working of cone

clutch mechanism























30

c,d

L6

single plate clutch, multi plate

clutch,


06002/

1. Understand the working of clutch T2 & R1 2. Differentiate Single plate clutch

from multi plate clutch,

31

c,d

L1

magnetic and centrifugal

clutches


06002/

1. Explain the working of Magnetic clutches

T2 & R1

2. Discuss the working of centrifugal clutches

32

c,d

L6

fluid fly wheel —gear boxes,

types,


06002/

1. Discuss the importance of fly wheel

T2 & R1 2. Classify various types of gear

boxes

33

c,d

L4

sliding mesh, constantt mesh,


06002/

1. Understand Sliding mesh mechanism

T2 & R1

2. Differentiate between sliding mesh and constant mesh

34

d

L2

epicyclic gear box , over drive

torque converter


06002/

1. Explain the working mechanism of Epicyclic gear box

T2 & R1 2.Discuss the importance of over

drive torque converter

35

d

L1

Propeller shaft — Hotch —

Kiss drive,


06002/

1. Describe the purpose of Propeller

shaft

T2 & R1 2.Discuss the working mechanism of

hotch —kiss drive

36

d

L2

Torque tube drive universal

joint


06002/

1. Discuss the importance of

universal joint in transmission

system.

T2 & R1

2.Explain the working mechanism of torque tube system

37

d

L4

differential rear axles — types

—wheels and tyres


06002/

1. Explain types of Differential rear

axles types wheels and tyres.

T2 & R1

2.Classify various axles and types

38

d

L1

Suspension System :Objects of

suspension systems


06002/

1. Understand the working of

suspension system

T2 & R1 2. Discuss various components in

suspension systems

39

d

L4

rigid axle suspension system,


06002/

1. Understand the working of suspension system

T2 & R1

2. Explain Rigid axle suspension system.























40

d

L2

torsion bar, shock absorber


06002/

1. Discuss the importance of using Torsion bar

T2 & R1

2.Explain the importance of shock absorber under sudden loads

41

d

L2

Independent suspension

system.


06002/

1. Discuss Independent suspension system.

T2 & R1

2.Explain Independent suspension system.

42

d

L4

Braking System :Mechanical

brake system,


06002/

1. Understand the importance of

Braking system

T2 & R1

2. Analyze mechanical brake system

43

d

L6

Hydraulic brake system,

Master cylinder,


06002/

1. Understand Hydraulic brake system

2. Design and analyze master

cylinder

T2 & R1

44

d

L2

wheel cylinder tandem master

cylinder Requirement of brake

fluid,


06002/

1. Analyze Wheel cylinder tandem

master cylinder requirement of brake

fluid

2. Explain Wheel cylinder tandem

master cylinder requirement of brake

fluid

T2 & R1

45

d

L2

pneumatic and vacuum brakes.


06002/

1. Understand working of Pneumatic and vacuum brakes.

2. Design Pneumatic and vacuum brakes

T2 & R1

46

c,d

L2

Steering System Steering

geometry , camber, castor,


06002/

1. Compute Steering system steering

geometry

T2 & R1

2. Analyze the functions of camber, castor

47

c,d

L1

king pin rake, combined angle

toein,


06002/

1. Understand King pin rake T2 & R1

2.Explain combined angle toeing,

48

c,d

L1

center point steering.


06002/

1. Understand Center point steering. T2 & R1

2. Design Center Point Steering.

49

c,d

L4

Types of steering mechanism

Ackerman steering mechanism,

Davis steering mechanism


06002/

1.Categorize Types of steering

mechanism

T2 & R1

2.Compare Ackerman steering

mechanism, Davis steering

mechanism

50 c,d L2 Steering mechanism Davis 1. Understand Steering mechanism T2 & R1























steering mechanism


06002/

2.Explain Davis steering mechanism

51

c,d

L2

steering gears — types,

steering linkages.


06002/

1. Categorize Steering gears.

T2 & R1 2. Compare different types, steering

linkages.

52

e

L1

Emissions from Automobiles —


06002/

1. Explain Emissions from automobiles

T2 & R1

2.Categorize Emissions from automobiles

53

e

L4

Pollution standards National

and international


06002/

1. Analyze Pollution standards national and international

T2 & R1 2.Compare Pollution standards

national and international

54

e

L1

Pollution Control Techniques,


06002/

1. Understand Pollution control techniques.

2. Explain Pollution control techniques

T2 & R1

55

e

L4

Multipoint fuel injection for SI

Engines.


06002/

1. Explain Multipoint fuel injection for si engines.

2.Design Multipoint fuel injection

for si engines

T2 & R1

56

a,e

L1

Common rail diesel injection


06002/

1. Understand Common rail diesel injection

2.Design Common rail diesel injection

T2 & R1

57

e

L1

Energy alternatives —

Solar,Photo-voltaic, hydrogen,


06002/

1.understand the concept of Energy alternatives alternative fuels

2.Explain the working of solar,

photo-voltaic, hydrogen as

T2 & R1

58

e

L2

Biomass, alcohols, LPG,CNG,


06002/

1.Discuss various alternative fuels

T2 & R1 2.Discuss the advantages of CNG

compared to Biomass, alcohols and

LPG

59

e

L4

liquid Fuels and gaseous fuels,


06002/

1.Differentiate Liquid fuels and gaseous fuels

T2 & R1

2.Discuss the advantages of gaseous fuels over Liquid fuels

60

e

L2

Hydrogen as a fuel for IC

Engines. - Their merits and

demerits.


06002/

1. Design an engine with hydrogen

as an alternative fuel

T2 & R1 2.Discuss the merits and demerits of

Hydrogen as a fuel for IC engines

























S= Supportive H=Highly Relative

9.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM

OUTCOMES:

Text Books & Referece Books

T1. S. S. Ratan , Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw- Hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.

T2. Theory of mechanisms and machines/ Jagdish Lal/ Metropolitan Book Company.

R1. J. S. Rao, R. V. Dugggipati , Mechanism and Machine Theory, New Age Publishers, New Delhi,

India.

R2. Shigley , Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.

R3. Thomas Bevan, Theory of machines, CBS Publishers, New Delhi, India.

R4. R.K.Bansal, Theory of machines, Lakshmi publications, New Delhi, India.

R5. Sadhu Singh, Theory of Machines, Pearson 3rd

edition.

R6. Ashok G Ambedkar, Mechanisms and Machines Theory, PHI/Eastern Economy Edition.

9.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM

OUTCOMES:

Course

Objective s

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N

I H S H S H S H S H

II H S S S H S H S S H

III H H S S H S S H S S H

IV H S H S H S H H S S S

V H S S H S S S H S S H

Course

Outcomes


a S S S S H S S H

b S S S H S H H S S H

c H S S H S S S S S S H

d S S S H S S S S S

e S S H S H S S S S S




10.11 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF BLOOMS TAXONOMY:

2.

Comprehensioning /

Comprehension :

Comprehending the

meaning, translation,

interpolation, and

interpretation of

instructions and

problems. State a

problem in one's own

words.

Key Words:

Classify, Compare,

Contrast,

Demonstrate, Explain,

Extend, Illustrate,

Infer, Interpret,

Outline, Relate,

Rephrase,

Show, Summarize,

Translate

3. Applicationing

/ Application:

Use a concept in a

new situation or

unprompted use

of an abstraction.

Applies what was

learned in the

classroom into

novel situations in

the work place.

Key Words:

Application,

Build, Choose,

Construct,

Develop,

Experiment, with,

Identify,

Interview, Make

use of, Model,

Organize, Plan,

Select, Solve,

Utilize

6. Creating / Synthesis : Builds a structure or pattern from diverse 4. Analyzing / 5. Evaluating / elements. Put Analysis : Evaluation: parts

Blooms Taxonomy

Separates material or

Make judgments

together to form a

concepts into about the value whole, with component parts of ideas or emphasis on so that its materials. creating a organizational new meaning

1.

Knowledgeing /

Knowledge: Recall or retrieve previous learned

information.

structure may be understood.

Distinguishes

between facts

and inferences.

Key Words:

Key Words: Agree,

Appraise,

Assess, Award,

Choose,

Compare, Conclude,

or structure.

Key Words:

Adapt, Build,

Change,

Choose, Combine,

Course Outcomes

Key Words:

Choose, Define,

Find,

How, Label,

List, Match,

Name, Omit,

Recall, Relate,

Select, Show,

Spell, Tell,

What, When,

Where, Which,

Who, Why

Analysis, Assume,

Categorize,

Classify,

Compare,

Conclusion,

Contrast,

Discover,

Dissect,

Distinguish,

Divide,

Examine, Function,

Criteria, Criticize,

Decide, Deduct,

Defend,

Determine,

Disprove,

Estimate,

Evaluation,

Explain,

Importance,

Influence,

Interpret, Judge, Justify,

Compile, Compose,

Construct,

Create,

Delete,

Design,

Develop,

Discuss,

Elaborate,

Estimate,

Formulate,

Happen, Imagine,

Inference, Mark, Measure, Improve, Inspect, List, Opinion, Invent, Make Motive, Perceive, up, Relationships, Prioritize, Maximize, Simplify, Prove, Rate, Minimize, Survey, Take, Recommend, Modify, part, in, Test For, Rule on, Select, Original, Theme Support, value Originate, Plan, Predict, Propose, Solution, Solve, Suppose, Test, Theory

a.Understand

the concepts on

working

principles of

various systems

in automobiles.

√

√

√

bClassify

various cooling

systems and

discuss the functions of

√

√

√



ignition and

electrical

systems in

automobiles.

c.Analyze

various

transmission

systems and

drive line units

of automobiles.

√

√

√

√

d.Specify design

considerations

in Braking and

Steering

systems.

√

√ √

√

e.Design an

automobile

which can run

on alternative

fuels duly by

reducing

emission levels

for achieving

eco-friendly

environment.

√

√

√

√

√



OBJECTIVE

QUESTIONS: UNIT – I

1. The most important characteristic of a lubricating oil is its [A]

a. Viscosity

b. Physical stability

c. chemical stability

d. resistance against corrosion

2. Basic automobile structure consists of the suspension system, axles, wheel [A]

a. Frame

b. Steering

c. Brakes

d. Lights

6. Small holes in the pump body provide a vent for

a. water

b. petrol

c. air

d. liquid

[C]

7. Percentage of fuel energy lost to the cylinder walls in an Automobile engine is approximately

[B]

a. 20

b. 30

c. 70

d. 100

8. The fluctuation of engine speed during a cycle depends upon [C]

a. Mass of crank shaft

3. Compression rings are generally made of a. Low carbon steel

b. High Carbon steel

c. A.D

d. Chromium

[ D]

4. The purpose of crankcase ventilation to a. Cool the coil

b. Supply oxygen to the crank case

c. Assist in maintaining the viscosity of coil

d. Remove vaporized water and fuel

[D]

5. In four wheel drive the number of gear boxes is a. 1

b. Depends on the design of vehicle

c. One gear box with more gear

d. 2

[D]



b. Power output

c. Speed of fly wheel

d. Mass Flywheel

9. Which of the following is not an automobile? [C]

a. Motor cycle

b. Passenger car

c. Aeroplane

d. Truck

10 . Connecting rod connects the crank shaft and [C]

a. Cylinder head

b. Cylinder block

c. Piston

d. Camshaft

13. Sequence of coolant circulation is a. pump-radiator-block-head

b. pump- block- radiator-head

c. Pump-block- head- radiator

d. pump-radiator- head –block

14. What percentage of heat supplied is carried by cooing water [C]

a. 5

b. 10

c. 30

d. 50

15. Maximum combustion pressure in a petrol car engine is about [C]

a. 6 KPa

b. 60 KPa

[C]

11. The most accurate petrol injection system is the a. Direct

b. port

c. sequential

d. throttle body

[ B]

a. The purpose of the fan is to flow of coolant draw air through the radiator

b. cool the engine by blowing air over it

c. provide drive to the coolant pump

[B] increase

12. The cheapest yet reasonably precise gasoline injection system is the a. Direct

b. port

c. sequential

d. throttle body

[D]



c. 6 MPa

d. 60 MPa

16. The glow plug is [C]

a. compression device

b. installed in the inlet manifold

c. Screwed into the combustion

d. used to plug the leakage of fuel

17. The cranking compression pressure in the diesel engine is

a.3000 K Pa

b.2000 K Pa

c 1000 KPa

d.500 KPa

[A]

18. Contact breaker points in the ignition system are opened by the cam and it will be closed by

[B]

a. spring

b. torsion spring

c. electric switch

d. fuse

19. Coolant pumps are of type. [B]

a. Reciprocating

b. Centrifugal

c. Centipetal

d. Electric

II Unit

1. The function of a stabilizer in an automobile is to decrease the tendency to [A] a. Roll

b. Pitch

c. yaw

d. dip

2. The coefficient of friction for the clutch facing is approximately [B ]

a. 0.1

b. 0.4

c. 0.8

d. 1.2

3. Clutch facings are usually attached to the plate by [D]

a. Steel rivets

b. brass rivets

c. aluminum screws

d. teel screws



4. The type of axle in which the wheel end is supported by a bearing inside the axle housing is

[A]

a. Half floating

b. three quarter floating

c. fully floating

d. one floating

5. To correct heavy toe contact on the crown wheel teeth [A]

a. Move the drive pinion in

b. move one drive pinion out

c. Move the crown wheel out

d. adjust back clash by the required amount

6. In the modern differential the type of gearing used for the drive pinion and crown wheel is

a. Spur [C]

b. spiral bevel

c. hypoid

d. cycloid

7. Electrolyte used in lead acid cell is [D]

a. NaOH

b. H2SO4

c. Water

d. Water + H2SO4

8. The Battery plates are made of alloy [B]

a. Tin

b. Lead

c. Iron

d. Silver|

9. While storing tyres , strong sunlight should not fall directly on the tyres because will damage the

tyre. [D]

a. Infra red

b. X ray

c. Gama ray

d. Ultraviolet rays

10. A clutch is usually designed to transmit maximum torque which is percent of the

maximum engine torque. [C]

a. Equal to the maximum energy of the engine

b. 80% of the maximum energy of the engine

c. 150% of the maximum energy of the engine

d. None of these

11. Continuity in the field windings can be tested with [A]

a. Multimeter.

b. Ammeter



c. Voltmeter

d. Continuity tester

12. The maximum intensity of pressure, which the clutch facing can with stand with out being

damaged is a. 50

b. 75

c. 100

d. None

[C]

13. In the air break air pressure is supplied by a

a. Compressor

b. Gas cylinder

c. Electric motor

d. Hydraulic cylinder

[A]

17. The function of a universal joint is to allow the propeller shaft to [A]

a. Change length

b. bend sideways

c. transfer torque at an angle

d. change inclination

18. The component of the torque converter that redirects the flow of oil to impeller is

a. Stator [B]

b. turbine

c. impeller

d. free wheel

14. Specific gravity of electrolyte is measured by [B]

a. Multimeter

b. Hydro Meter

c. Ammeter

d. Dynamometer

15. Any short circuit in the armature winding may be tested with [B]

a. Multimeter

b. Growler

c. Voltmeter

d. Ammeter

16. The blades in a torque converter have a shape which is [B]

a. Square

b. round

c. flat

d. curved



19. Clutch facing are usually attached to the plate [B ]

a. Steel Rivets

b. Brass rivets

c. Aluminum Screws

d. Steel Screws

20. Central portion of propeller shaft is made from [C ]

a. Steel Shaft

b. Gunmetal Shaft

c. Steel tube

d. Castiron shaft

III Unit

1. The most widely used fuel supply system for car engines is the [D] a. gravity

b. pressure

c. vacuum

d. pump

2. LPG contains mainly [A]

a. Butane & Propane

b. Butane & Nitrogen

c. Butane & Oxygen

d. Propane & Nitrogen

3. Most accurate petrol injection system is [B]

a. Direct injection

b. Port injection

c. Manifold Injection

d. Throttle body injection

4. The air fuel ratio required for the efficient operation of a three-way converter is approximately

[C]

1. 5:1 2. 10:1

3. 15:1

4. 20:1

5. The firing order for an in-line four cylinder I.C. engine is [B]

a. 1-2-4-3

b. 1-3-4-2

c. 1-2-3-4

d. 1-3-2-4

6. . Which of the following indicates a multigrade oil ? [D]

a. API 50



b. SAE 30

c. API SF

d. SAE 20 W-50

7. The crescent-shaped cavity on the piston head top surface is called as [C ]

a. piston oil hole

b. snap ring

c. valve recess

d. valve clearance

8. The air resistance to a car at 20 kmph is R. The air resistance at 40 kmph will be [D]

a. 2R

b. 3R

c. R

d. 4R

9. The major purpose of an electronically-controlled automatic transmission is that this type of

transmission [B]

a. eliminates the gear shift lever

b. reduces shift shock and achieves more efficient transmission of engine torque

c. reduces the number of automatic-transmission components

d. eliminates gear clutches

10. The effect of having excess camber is [D]

a. too much traction

b. excessive steering alignment torque

c. hard steering

d. uneven tyre wear

11. The co-efficient of rolling resistance for a truck weighing 63 500 N is 0.018. The rolling resistance

to the truck is [A ]

a. 1143 N

b. 1.143 N

c. 114.3 N

d. 11.43 N

12. The natural gas is compressed in a CNG cylinder at a pressure of [A]

a. 200 bar

b. 220 bar

c. 300 bar

d. 250 bar

13. The cetane rating of Diesel fuel is in the order of [B]

a. 25

b. 45

c. 60

d. 70



14. The difference between DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids is [D]

a.DOT 4 fluid is more resistant to freezing than DOT 3 fluid

b.DOT 4 fluid has a lower boiling point than DOT 3 fluid

c. DOT 3 and DOT 4 fluids have the same boiling point, but DOT 4 fluid has a longer service life

d. DOT 4 fluid has a higher boiling point than DOT 3 fluid

15. The valve overlap in four stroke petrol engines is approximately [ B ]

a. 60°

b. 30°

c. 90°

d. 120°

16. The function of a stabilizer in an automobile is to decrease the tendency to [A]

a. Roll

b. pitch

c. yaw

d. dip

17. The coefficient of friction for the clutch facing is approximately [B]

a. 0.1

b. 0.4

c. 0.8

d. 1.2

18. Clutch facings are usually attached to the plate by [D]

a. Steel rivets

b. brass rivets

c. aluminum screws

d. steel screws

19. The type of axle in which the wheel end is supported by a bearing inside the axle housing

[A]

a. Half floating

b. three quarter floating

c. fully floating

d. one floating

20. To correct heavy toe contact on the crown wheel teeth [A]

a. Move the drive pinion in

b. move one drive pinion out

c. Move the crown wheel out

d. adjust back clash by the required amount



IV Unit

1. In the modern differential the type of gearing used for the drive pinion and crown wheel is [C]

a. Spur

b. spiral bevel

c. hypoid

d. cycloid

2. The maximum Torque multiplication ratio in a Torque convertor is about [A]

a. 100

b. 25

c. 10

d. 2.5

3. room in the engine compartment is provided with suspension [B]

a. Wishbone type

b. McPherson strut

c. rigid axle

d. vertical guide In a torque

4.The component of the torque converter that drivers oil is [B]

a. Turbine

b. Impeller

c. Freewheel

d. Stator

5.The turning circle for a car is nearly [C]

a. 1m

b. 2m

c. 10m

d. 30 m

6. The hand break usually operates on [A]

a. Rear Wheels

b. Front Wheels

c. Right Wheels

d. Left Wheels

7. In vacuumed booster servo assistant hydraulic breaks, vacuum is developed [A]

a. High speed

b. medium speed

c. low speed

d. stop

8. The function of the unloaded valve is to [C]

a. Relive the pressure of the air in the reservoir

b. filter the air

c. relive the load on the compressor

d. A&B



9. The distance between adjacent machine teeth of mating is called the [C]

a. Clearance

b. pitch line

c. back lash

d. Flank

10. The condition that causes vapour locking in a brake system is [ A ]

a. keeping the vehicle without use for an extended period

b. overheating of the fluid due to frequent brake application

c. overcooling of the brakes during high speed driving

d. an excessively high engine speed on a downhill road

11. In a ventilated disc brake, [B]

a. a.caliper is covered with cooling fins

b. disc contains radial vanes between its rubbing

c. surfaces for optimum cooling performance

d. a duct directs air towards the caliper for

12. The function of antilock brake system (ABS) is that is [A]

a. maintains directional control during braking by preventing the wheels from locking

b. reduces the stopping distance

c. minimises the brake fade

d. prevents nose dives during braking and thereby postpones locking of the wheels

13. Electrolyte used in lead acid cell is [D]

a. NaOH

b. H2SO4

c. Water

d. Water + H2SO4

14.Any short circuit in the armature winding may be tested with [B]

a. Multimeter

b. Growler

c. Voltmeter

d. Ammeter

15. The correct flow of power through the drive train is [A]

a. engine - clutch - mainshaft - countershaft - final driven gear - driveshafts - wheels

b. engine - mainshaft - countershaft - clutch - final driven gear - driveshafts - wheels

c. engine - clutch - countershaft - mainshaft - final driven gear - driveshafts - wheels

d. engine - driveshafts - clutch - mainshaft - countershaft - final driven gear - wheels

16. In order to implement gear changes in the gear unit of an automatic transmission, a

is used. [B]

a. planetary gear

b. hydraulic multi plate clutch

c. synchronizer



d. magnetic clutch

17. Two advantages of using helical gears rather than spur gears in a transmission system are

[D]

a. strength and cost

b. strength and less end thrust

c. noise level and economy

d. noise level and strength

18.Which part of the automobile tyre is subjected to greatest flexing action ? [B]

a. Bead

b. Side wall

c. Tread

d. Shoulder

19.The purpose of turning radius gauges is to measure the [D]

a. difference in the toe angles of the left and right wheels

b. free play of the steering wheel

c. contact areas of the tyres

d. turning radius of the left and right wheels

20. The spark plug contains electrodes [A]

a. 2

b. 3

c. 1

d. 4

V Unit

1. steering ratio for manual steering of cars is approximately [A ]

a. 5

b. 15

c. 50

d. 100

2. Most popular manual steering gear for cars today is [ A]

a. Rack & Pinion

b. Warm & Whee

c. Cam & roller

d. Worm and nut

3. The brake efficiency of a new vehicle is about [ C]

a. 30%

b. 50%

c. 80%

d. 100%



4. The two basic types of axles are [ B]

5. Oil in the axle casing is required to [B ]

a. Lubricate the wheel

b. lubricate the rear axle

c. smear oil and the brake drum

d. None

6. The type of wheel which cannot be used with a tubeless type is

a. Alloy wheel

b. Rim wheel

c. Spoke wheel

d. Fly wheel

[C]

10. The type of steering gear used in a maruti 800 car is [A]

a. Rack & pinion

b. Pitman axis

c. Worm & wheel

d. None of the abov

11. The painting of automobiles is done to [B]

a. improve its external appearance

b. all of these

c. retain the characteristics of steel for long

d. prevent rust from growing on the body

7. In modern vehicles, head hight dimming switch is mounted on the [A] a. Steering column

b. Shaft column

c. Differential column

d. Gear shaft column

8. The sum of camber and S.A.I. is called as _ a. Camber angle

b. Castor angle

c. included angle

d. acute angle

[B]

9. How much distance for the turning circle for a car is approximately _ a. 10 meters

b. 6 meters

c. 36 cm

d. 25 meters

[A]



12. The driveshafts are connected to the differential and wheel hubs through universal joints because the

universal joints [A ]

a. Compensate for variations in the relative positions of the differential and the wheels which result

from bumpy road surfaces or other similar driving conditions.

b. absorb the vibrations transferred from the surface of the road

c. absorb any difference in speed between the left and right wheels when the vehicle is turning

d. .none of the above

13. The number of exhaust manifolds in a V-6 engine are [A]

a. 2

b. 4

c. 1

d. 3

14. The purpose of a cylinder head gasket is to [B]

a. prevent engine oil from going into combustion chamber

b. prevent the combustion gases from leaking from the joint between the cylinder block and the cylinder

head

c. none of the above

d. removes impurities from cylinder head lubricating oil

15. The size of engine cylinder is referred in terms of its [A]

a. bore and stroke

b. displacement and efficiency

c. diameter and bore

d. bore and length

16. The calorific value of petrol is about [B]

a. 39.4 - 42.5 MJ/kg

b. 42.7 - 43.5 MJ/kg

c. 36.5 - 38.5 MJ/kg

d. 45.5 - 47 MJ/kg

17. The stroke of an engine is the [A]

a. distance between T.D.C. and B.D.C

b. length of the connecting rod

c. internal diameter of the cylinder

d. volume of the cylinder

18. The connecting rods are generally made of shaped cross-section. [D]

a. L

b. C

c. H

d. I

19. The octane rating of petrol commerically available is [B]

a. 100-110

b. 85-95



c. 95-100

d. 110-125

20. The rating of C.I. engine fuel (Diesel) is given by [A]

a. cetane number

b. octane number

c. performance number

d. none of these

9.12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

Si No.

UNIT-I Tutorials Short Answer Questions Blooms Taxonomy

Level Course

Outcome

1 What are the advantages and disadvantages of Petrol and Diesel engines used on automobiles?

Remember a

2 What is the function of the fuel injection pump Remember a,b

3 Discuss the usual types of diesel injectors? Understand a,b

4 What are the two main classes of carburetors? Remember b

5 Discuss clearly the need of triple venture system in carburetor. Understand b

6 Explain various methods of oil lubrication to the engine parts? Understand a

7 How the automobiles are classified? Understand a

8 How do you check the alignment of chassis frame? Understand a

9 Explain GDI System. Understand a

10 Describe the funcyion of catalytic converter. Knowledge a,b

Si

No. UNIT-I Tutorials Long Answer Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

1 Discuss the working of simple single jet carburetor Understand b

2 Explain briefly various parts of an automobile with the help of simple sketch

Understand b

3 Explain various defects of simple single jet carburetor. Understand b

4 Give the classification of automobiles. Remember a

5 How are the defects of simple single jet carburetor are eliminated. Understand a

7 Describe the construction and working of inline fuel injection pump and mention the fuel supply control in it.

Understand b

8 Differentiate between in-line fuel injection pump and distributor type fuel Injection pump

Analyze a

9 Why should unleaded gasoline be used for engines employing catalytic converter?

Understand a

10 What are the various air cleaners used in diesel engine and explain the construction & working of light duty air cleaner?

Remember a



Si

No. UNIT-II Tutorials Short Answer Questions

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

1 Mention the advantages of electronic ignition system over the conventional ignition?

Understand b

2 Write a short note on contact breakers for ignition system. Understand b

3 What is ignition advance and on what factors does it depend? Remember b

4 What are the various methods of oil lubrication to the engine parts?

Remember A

5 Discuss the usual types of diesel injectors? Understand B

6 What are the functions of a governor in an injection pump? Remember B

7 What are the various lights used on automobile and mention the importance of each one of them?

Remember a,b

8 What are the advantages and applications of pump circulation system over thermo-syphon system?

Remember B

9 On what factors ignition advance depends? Remember B

10 Name the most commonly used valve in an automobile engine? Remember a,b

Si

No. UNIT-II Tutorials Long Answer Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

1 Describe the function of distribution system and explain with a sketch, the construction & working mechanism.

Understand B

2 Explain with neat sketch the importance of main Jet & compensating Jet used in carburetor.

Understand B

3 Sketch and explain the pump circulation system of cooling system of the engines.

Remember b,c

4 Discuss the common troubles occurring in the starting system of

automobile and mention suitable remedies. Understand a,b

5 Write a detailed note on electronic ignition system. What are its advantages over the conventional ignition system?

Remember B

6 Bring out the differences between standard Bendix drive and compression spring type Bendix drive.

Analyse C

7 Describe with a simplified diagram, the working of electronic ignition system.

Understand B

8 Explain briefly the multi point fuel injection system for SI engines and common rail diesel injection for CI engines.

Understand B

9 Sketch and explain the construction and working of magneto ignition system.

Understand B

10 Describe how octane selector method is used in manual ignition advance.

Understand B

Si No.

UNIT-III Tutorials Short Answer Questions Blooms Taxonomy

Level Course

Outcome

1 Name any four automobile essential accessories. b,c

2 Explain the following terms. (a) Voltage regulator (b) Horn Understand C



3 What is thermister? Remember b,c

4 Write short notes on Wiper Remember b,c

5 Explain the function of alternator regulator. Understand C

6 Mention the various types of heaters for the cars? Remember C

7 Write short notes on Oil pressure gauge Understand b,c

8 What are the advantages and disadvantages of multi plate clutch over single plate clutch?

Remember C

9 What is purpose of front axle? Remember C

10 Differentiate between Wet clutch and dry clutch Analyze C

Si

No. UNIT-III Tutorials Long Answer Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

1 How many types of heaters are available for the cars? Explain the principle of each type and discuss the hot water type of heaters in detail.

Understand b,c

2 Explain with a Schematic diagram the layout of an air suspension

Understand C system and also the importance of air springs

3 Sketch a hydraulic clutch and explain its advantages over frictional clutch.

Understand C

4 What is the purpose of using anti- roll device in the suspension system and explain its functions?

Remember C

5 Compare the merits and demerits of frameless construction with

those of conventional framed construction in automobile body

building.

Analyze

b,c

6 Describe with a schematic diagram the layout of the power transmission from engine to wheels of rear wheel driven car.

Understand C

7 What is an epi-cyclic gear box? Discuss its principle with the help of a neat sketch.

Remember C

8 Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of synchromesh gear box over other type of gear boxes.

Understand C

9 What is the function of a clutch and explain various factors acting the torque transmission in a Clutch?

Remember C

10 Write the difference between the following Fully centrifugal clutch and semi-centrifugal clutch

Remember C

i

No. UNIT-IV Tutorials Short Answer Questions

Blooms Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

1 Why and when power steering is required? Understand D

2 Describe the two mechanisms of steering gear Understand D

3 Explain the following terms a) camber b) caster Understand D

4 What are the functions of suspension in a motor vehicle? Remember D

5 Describe an independent front end suspension using torsion bars. Understand D

6 Write a short notes on Helper Springs D

7 Explain the following terms a) king-pin inclination b) Rake angle Understand D

8 Differentiate between Leaf Springs and Tapered leaf springs. Analyze D

9 List out the advantages and disadvantages of Hydrogas interconnected system over plastic suspension.

Remember c,d

10 Name important angles of steering geometry. Remember D



Si

No. UNIT-IV Tutorials Long Answer Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

1 Differentiate between master and wheel cylinders used in hydraulic breaking system.

Analyze D

2 Explain the working principle of power brakes. Understand D

3 Explain with a Schematic diagram the layout of an air suspension system and also the importance of air springs

Understand c,d


Remember c,d

5 Differentiate between independent suspension over the rigid axle suspension mentioning their advantages and applications.

Analyze c,d

6 What is the function of an anti - roll device in vehicles and explain its usage in actual practice?

Remember D

7 What is power steering system used in automobiles and how it is different from the conventional steering system?

Remember D

8 Explain various steering troubles and mention suitable remedies. Understand D

9 How is the vacuum from the engine inlet manifold utilized to actuate the vehicle brakes? Explain with the help of neat sketches.

Understand D

10 Describe an independent front end suspension using torsion bars. Understand c,d

Si No.

UNIT-V Tutorials Short Answer Questions Blooms Taxonomy

Level Course

Outcome

1 How does an automobile contribute towards pollution of the atmosphere?

Understand E

2 Name the areas of automobile emitting pollutant. Remember E

3 How Solar energy can be utilized as an alternative fuel? Understand E

4 Describe briefly the working principle of Sonex system. Understand E

5 Name various pollutants in the Exhaust? Remember E

6 Name any four automobile essential accessories. Remember a,e

7 Write a short note on liquid Fuels used in IC Engines. Remember E

8 What is Biomass? Remember E

9 Explain its function of thermister in the alternator regulator. Understand d,e

10 What is thermister? Remember d,e

Si

No. UNIT-V Tutorials Long Answer Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

1 Discuss various methods to reduce the emission of pollutants in exhaust gases.

Understand E

2 What are the various areas of automobile emitting pollutants and name various pollutants in the Exhaust?

Remember E

3 Discuss in detail various changes in the fuel supply system of engines for controlling emissions.

Understand E

4 What is sonex system for emission control? Describe briefly the principle of its working.

Remember E

5 What are the various faults occurring in the generator and explain the method of detecting the faults and rectification?

Remember d,e



6 What is thermister? Explain its function in the alternator regulator. Remember d,e

7 List out the merits and demerits of various fuels used in IC Engines.

Remember E

8 Explain with a sketch the construction and working of Folio-thru starting drive.

Understand d,e

9 Discuss in detail the various areas of automobile emitting pollutants?

Understand E

10 How proper design of combustion chamber helps to reduce exhaust emissions?

Understand E

ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 What is decarbonising of engine? Remember a,b

2 What are the advantages and disadvantages of Petrol and Diese l engines used on automobiles?

Remember a,b

3 What is the function of the fuel injection pump? Remember a,b

4 Discuss clearly the need of triple venture system in carburetor. Understand A

5 What are the various factors to be considered in selecting the capacity of engine for a particular automobile?

Remember A

6 Discuss the usual types of diesel injectors? Understand a,b

7 What is crankcase ventilation and how can it be achieved in an engine? Remember A

8 Explain MPFI System. Understand A

9 What are the various methods of oil lubrication to the engine parts? Remember A

10 hat are the two main classes of carburetors? Remember A

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 escribe briefly the mechanism of front wheel, rear wheel and four wheel drive. Enlist the advantages and disadvantages of each.

Understand A

2 Explain briefly the various types of chassis construction

with help of suitable diagrams.

Understand

A

3 ow do you check the alignment of chassis frame? Remember A

4 xplain various defects of simple single jet carburetor. Understand A



5 Discuss the working of simple single jet carburetor Understand A

6 Discuss the relative advantages of various lubricants and explain about blending and compounding.

Understand A

7 What is decarbonising of engine? Why it is required in automobile engines. Remember A

8 What are the advantages and disadvantages of Petrol and Diese l engines used on automobiles?

Remember a,b

9 Explain briefly various parts of an automobile with the help of simple sketch. Understand A

10 ifferentiate between in-line fuel injection pump and distributor type fuel Injection pump.

Analyze a,b

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments


1 What are the advantages and applications of pump circulation system over thermo-syphon system?

Remember B

2 Name the heaters available for the cars? Remember B

3 Mention the advantages of electronic ignition system over the conventional ignition?

Remember B

4 Explain the function of Wiper? Understand B

5 What is ignition advance and on what factors does it depend? Remember a,b

6 Write a short note on contact breakers for ignition system. Remember B

7 Write short notes on the following (a) Wiper (b) Oil pressure gauge Remember B

8 Explain the following terms. (a) Voltage regulator (b) Horn Understand B

9 What are the various methods of oil lubrication to the engine parts? Remember B

10 On what factors ignition advance depends? Remember a,b

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments


1 What are the advantages of electronic ignition system over the conventional ignition system?

Remember a,b

2 Describe with a simplified diagram, the working of electronic ignition system.

Remember a,b

3 What are the advantages and applications of pump circulation system over Remember a,b



thermo-syphon system?

4 Sketch and explain the pump circulation system of cooling system of the engines.

Analyse B

5 Describe with a simplified diagram, the working of magneto coil ignition system.

Remember a,b

6 Describe how octane selector method is used in manual ignition advance. Remember a,b

7 What is the necessity of using a thermostat in the cooling system? Discuss the construction and working of any thermostat valve.

Remember B

8 Explain with neat sketch the importance of main Jet & compensating Jet used in carburetor.

Understand B

9 Bring out the differences between standard Bendix drive and compression spring type Bendix drive.

Analyze B

10 What are the advantages of rubber spring type Bendix drive over compression spring type bending drive?

Remember B

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments


1 Explain the purpose of using anti- roll device in the suspension system. Understand C

2 Differentiate between Wet clutch and dry clutch. Remember C

3 What is purpose of front axle? Remember a,c


Remember C

5 Explain the function of alternator regulator. Understand C

6 Mention the various types of heaters for the cars? C

7 Explain various factors acting the torque transmission in a Clutch. Understand C

8 List out the advantages and disadvantages of centrifugal clutch. Remember C

9 Write short notes on Oil pressure gauge. Remember C

10 Explain the advantages of frictional clutch over centrifugal clutch. Understand C

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments


1 Sketch a hydraulic clutch and explain its advantages over frictional clutch. Remember C

2 Compare the merits and demerits of frameless construction with those of conventional framed construction in automobile body building.

Analyze C




Remember C

4 What is an epi-cyclic gear box? Discuss its principle with the help of a neat sketch.

Remember C

5 Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of synchromesh gear box over other type of gear boxes.

Understand C

6 Explain various steering troubles and mention suitable remedies Understand C

7 What is the function of a clutch and explain various factors acting the torque transmission in a Clutch?

Remember C


Understand C

9 Compare the merits and demerits of frameless construction with those of conventional framed construction in automobile body building.

Analyze C

10 How many types of heaters are available for the cars? Explain the principle of each type and discuss the hot water type of heaters in detail.

Remember C

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Assignments


1 Describe an independent front end suspension using torsion bars. Understand c,d

2 Describe the two mechanism of steering gear Understand D

3 Write a short notes on Helper Springs Remember D

4 Explain the following terms a) king-pin inclination b) Rake angle Understand c,d

5 Explain following terms toe-in and toe-out. Understand D

6 Describe the two mechanisms of steering gear Understand D

7 Name important angles of steering geometry. Remember D

8 Why and when power steering is required? Understand D

9 Differentiate between Leaf Springs and Tapered leaf springs. Analyze c,d

10 List out the advantages and disadvantages of Hydrogas interconnected system over plastic suspension.

Remember c,d

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Assignments



Remember c,d



2 Explain the conventional steering system? Create D


Remember D

4 Differentiate between independent suspension over the rigid axle suspension mentioning their advantages and applications.

Analyze c,d

5 Explain various steering troubles and mention suitable remedies. Understand D


Remember c,d


Understand c,d


Remember D

9 Differentiate between master and wheel cylinders used in hydraulic breaking system.

Analyze D

10 Explain the working principle of power brakes. Create D

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Assignments



Understand E

2 What is Biomass? Remember E

3 Name any four automobile essential accessories. Remember a,e

4 Write a short note on liquid Fuels used in IC Engines. E

5 Explain its function of thermister in the alternator regulator. Understand d,e

6 Name various pollutants in the Exhaust? Remember E


Understand E

8 Name the areas of automobile emitting pollutants. Remember E

9 How does an automobile contribute towards pollution of the atmosphere? E

10 Name the areas of automobile emitting pollutant. Remember E



Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Assignments



Understand E

2 What is sonex system for emission control? Describe briefly the principle of its working.

Remember E

3 What is thermister? Explain its function in the alternator regulator. Remember d,e

4 What are the various faults occurring in the generator and explain the method of detecting the faults and rectification?

Remember d,e

5 Discuss in detail the various areas of automobile emitting pollutants? Understand E


Understand E

7 Describe how proper design of combustion chamber helps to reduce exhaust emissions.

Remember d,e

8 How proper design of combustion chamber helps to reduce exhaust emissions?

Apply d,e

9 Discuss in detail the various automobile emitting pollutants? Understand E

10 What are the various areas of automobile emitting pollutants and name various pollutants in the Exhaust?

Remember E


10. ENGINEERING METROLOGY

10.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION FORM

Course Title Engineering Metrology

Course Code A50318


4 1 - 4

Course Coordinator K.Shravan Kumar,Assistant Professor

Team of Instructors

COURSE OVERVIEW: To provide a basic understanding of the wide range of activities encompassed by

personnel working in standards and calibration laboratories. It covers the measurement

process, types and correct use of measurement and test equipment, and measurement

standards. It provides an opportunity for students to learn about measurement uncertainty

and risk analysis. The course includes the procedures necessary to set up and to have

knowledge on calibration.

At the end of this subject the student is expected it is expected to enforce, validate and

verify predefined standards for traceability, accuracy, reliability, and precision. All of

these are factors that would affect the validity of measurement. Although these standards

vary widely, these are mandated by the government, the agencies, and some treaties.

Consequently, these standards are verified and tested against a recognized quality system

in calibration laboratories.

10.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods / Week Prerequisites Production technology,

UG 4 5 Machine Drawing

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 45


10.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

University End Total

Sessional Marks

Exam marks marks

Mid Semester Test There shall be two midterm examinations.

Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and

objective type tests.

The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60 minutes duration. Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the student has to

answer 2 questions, each carrying 5 marks. 75 100

The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20 minutes duration. It consists of 10 Multiple choice and 10 objective

type questions, the student has to answer all the questions and

each carries half mark.

First midterm examination shall be conducted for the first two and half units of syllabus and second midterm examination

shall be conducted for the remaining portion.

University End Total

Sessional Marks

Exam marks marks

Assignment

Five marks are earmarked for assignments. There shall be two assignments in every theory course. Marks shall be awarded considering the average of two assignments

in each course.


S. No Component Marks

Duration

1 I Mid Examination 80 minutes 20

2 I Assignment - 05

3 II Mid Examination 80 minutes 20

4 II Assignment - 05




COURSE OBJECTIVES: To be familiar with the different instruments those are available for linear,

angular, roundness and roughness measurements. To be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a

specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc.) It is the aim of this course to provide students with practical skills associated

with each of these areas. Metrology activities include precision measurement of

component features, form and geometry utilizing specialized measuring

instruments and equipment.

IV. Effectively designing product processing methods.

To enhance the ability of students to apply scientific methods of protection

10.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

Graduates will demonstrate basic knowledge in mathematics, science and engineering

Graduates will demonstrate an understanding of their professional and ethical responsibilities

Graduates will demonstrate the ability to function on engineering and science

laboratory teams, as well as on multidisciplinary design teams Graduates will demonstrate the ability to identify, formulate and solve

mechanical engineering problems Graduates will have the confidence to apply engineering solutions in global and

societal contexts. Graduates should be capable of self-education and clearly understand the value of life-long learning. Graduates will have ability to

communicate in written, oral and graphical forms.


Program Outcomes

Level

Proficiency

assessed by

A Graduates will demonstrate the ability to use basic Assignments, knowledge in mathematics, science and engineering and

H Tutorials, apply them to solve problems specific to mechanical

Exams

engineering (Fundamental engineering analysis skills).

B Graduates will demonstrate the ability to design and conduct experiments, interpret and analyze data, and report S Project work

results (Information retrieval skills).

C Graduates will demonstrate the ability to design any Assignments,

mathematical system or thermal that meets desired S Tutorials,

specifications and requirements (Creative skills). Exams

D Graduates will demonstrate the ability to function as a coherent unit in multidisciplinary design teams, and deliver S Project work results through collaborative research (Teamwork).



E Graduates will demonstrate the ability to identify, formulate

Assignments,

and solve mechanical engineering problems of a complex H

Exams

kind (Engineering problem solving skills).

F Graduates will demonstrate an understanding of their Assignments,

professional and ethical responsibilities, and use technology H

Tutorials,

for the benefit of mankind(Professional integrity).

G Graduates will be able to communicate effectively in both S --

verbal and written forms (Speaking / writing skills).

H Graduates will have the confidence to apply engineering Assignments, solutions in global and national contexts (Engineering impact H

Tutorials,

assessment skills).

I Graduates should be capable of self-education and clearly Assignments, understand the value of life-long learning (Continuing H

Tutorials,

education awareness).

J Graduates will develop an open mind and have an understanding of the impact of engineering on society and

S

--

demonstrate awareness of contemporary issues (Social

awareness).

K Graduates will be familiar with applying software methods and modern computer tools to analyze mechanical H --

engineering problems (Software hardware interface).

L Graduates will have the ability to recognize the importance of

professional development by pursing post graduate studies or Gate exam, face competitive examinations that offer challenging and S Job

rewarding careers in Mechanical Engineering (Successful interviews

career andimmediate employment).

M Graduate will be able to design a system to meet desired needs within environmental, economic, political, ethical Assignments,

health and safety, manufacturability and management H Tutorials, knowledge and techniques to estimate time, resources to Exams

complete project (Practical engineering analysis skills).

N = N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related

10.7 SYLLABUS

UNIT-1 Systems of limits and fits: Introduction, normal size, tolerance limits, deviations,

allowance, fits and their types - unilateral and bilateral tolerance system, hole and shaft

basis systems – interchangeability and selective assembly. Indian standard Institution

system - British standard system, International Standard system for plain ad screwed work.

UNIT - II LINEAR MEASUREMENT : Length standard, line and end standard, slip gauges -

calibration of the slip gauges, Dial indicator, micrometers.MEASUREMENT OF ANGLES AND TAPERS : Different methods - Bevel protractor - angle slipgauges – spirit

levels - sine bar - Sine plate, rollers and spheres used to determine the tapers.



LIMIT GAUGES : Taylors principle - Design of go and No go gauges, plug ring, snap, gap, taper, profile and position gauges.

UNIT - III OPTICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENTS : Tool maker's microscope and its uses - collimators, optical projector - optical flats and their uses, interferometer. FLAT SURFACE MEASUREMENT : Measurement of flat surfaces - instruments used - straight edges- surface plates - optical flat and auto collimator.

UNIT - IV SURFACE ROUGHNESS MEASUREMENT : Differences between surface roughness

and surfacewaviness-Numerical assessment of surface finish - CLA,R, R.M.S Values - Rz values, Rz value, Methodsof measurement of surface finish-profilograph. Talysurf, ISI

symbols for indication of surface finish.

UNIT-V

SCREW THREAD MEASUREMENT : Element of measurement - errors in screw threads measurementof effective diameter, angle of thread and thread pitch, profile thread gauges. MEASUREMENT THROUGH COMPARATORS : Comparators - Mechanical, Electrical and ElectronicComparators, pneumatic comparators and their uses in mass

production. MACHINE TOOL ALIGNMENT TESTS : Requirements of Machine Tool Alignment Tests, Alignmenttests on lathe, milling, drilling machine tools.. Preparation of

acceptance charts. GEAR MEASUREMENT: Gear measuring instruments, Gear tooth profile measurement. Measurement of diameter, pitch pressure angle and tooth thickness.Coordinate Measuring Machines: Types of CMM, Role of CMM, and Applications of CMM.

TEXT BOOKS :

Engineering Metrology / I C Gupta./ Danpath Rai

Engineering Metrology / R.K. Jain / Khanna Publishers

REFERENCES :

BIS standards on Limits & Fits, Surface Finish, Machine Tool Alignment etc.



10.8 COURSEPLAN: At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following course learning outcomes.(The course plan is meant as a guideline. There may probably be changes.

Lecture Course Learning Topics to be covered Reference

No. Outcomes

Classify of Measuring

Basic measuring elements, classification T1

of measuring instruments and measuring

1 Instruments and

methods

Measuring methods

Define Limit, Normal

Limits , upper limit, lower limit, tolerance T1

2

normal size, deviations and allowance.

Size , Allowance

System of limits. Unilateral system, T1

3 List Out the types of Bilateral system. Maximum metal limit, Writing Tolerance

Least metal limit.

4

Classify the Types of

Fit. Classification of fits, clearance fit, T1

interference fit and transition fit.

Fits

5 Illustrate the Fits and Terminology for fit and limits. T1 Limits

System obtaining for different types of T1

Describe fit. Hole basis system and Shaft basis

6 interchangeability, system, interchangeability, selective selective assembly. assembly.

Define ISI system,

ISI system, British standard system, T1 International standard system for plain

7

British standard

and screwed work, problems solved .

system,

Evaluate Converting Converting hole based system fit into an

T1 hole based system fit

8

equivalent shaft based fit.

into an equivalent shaft

based fit.

Linear measurement. Basic units. Meter T1

9

Write the Basic Units

standard, yard standard.

Distinguish Between Line standard, end standard, calibration T1

10 Line standard and end

of end standard

standard



Use of Slip gauges For

Slip gauges, calibration of slip gauges,

11 Linear Measurement grade of slip gauges, wringing and care T1

of slip gauges.

12 Identify the Errors In Dial indicator uses and sources of errors. T1 Dial Indicator

16+ Identify the Errors In Micrometers uses and sources of errors. T1 Micrometer

List out the Measurement of angles and tapers. Sine

Instruments for T1

14

bar, slip gauges bevel protractor. measurement of

Angles

Explain The Principle Spirit level, sine plate. Rollers and

15 of Sprit Level spheres used to determine the angle of T1

tapers.

16 Use of Angle Gauges Angle gauges. Problems solved. T1

Demonstrate how to To check the angle of taper workspace T1

17 check the angle of taper

and holes. Problems solved.

workspace and holes.

List out the types of Gauges, types of gauges, plug, ring, snap T1

18 Gauges and plane gauges.

Apply The Taylor’s Taylor's principle- Design of GO and T1

19 Principle in Designing NOGO gauges. Of gauges

20 Explain Optical Optical measuring instruments. T2 measuring instruments.

Illustrate the Working Tool maker's microscope and its uses.

T2

21 of Tool maker's

microscope

List Out the

Optical flat. Flat surface measurement T2

Surface plate, knife edge and straight

.

22 Instruments for Flat

edge.

surface measurement

Demonstrate the Optical projector and Auto collimeter.

T2

23 Working of Optical

projector



24 Describe Flat surface Flat surface measurement . T2 measurement .

Distinguish Between

knife edge and straight edge.

T2

25 knife edge and straight

edge.

26 Discuss Interferometer Interferometer and their uses. T2

Distinguish between Differences between surface roughness T2

27 surface roughness and and surface Waviness surface Waviness

Evaluate of surface Evaluation of surface finish, CLA R.MS T2

28 finish, and Rz values .

29 Define Geometrical Geometrical irregularities. T2 irregularities.

Write Numerical Numerical assessment of surface finish. T2

30

assessment of surface

finish.

List out Direct Direct instrument method. Stylus, T2

31 instrument methods. applications.

Explain the working Profilometer, Tarmlinson surface meter T2

32 principle of .applications

Profilometer

Explain the working Taylor-Hobson talysurf. .

T2

33

principle of Taylor-

Hobson talysurf.

Write the ISI symbol ISI symbol for indication of surface finish T2

34

for indication of

surface finish

35 Identify the Different Introduction to comparators. T2 Comparators

Classify the Comparators - Mechanical comparators, T2

36 Mechanical

applications and advantages

Comparators

Distinguish Between Electrical and Electronic Comparators,

T2

37 Electrical and

Electronic



Comparators applications and advantages.

Explain Pneumatic Pneumatic comparators and their uses in T2

38 comparators

mass production

State the Advantages Advantages of Pneumatic comparators

T2 of Pneumatic

39 comparators over over Mechanical comparators Mechanical

comparators

Discuss the Screw Introduction to screw thread T2

40 thread measurement measurement.

41 Identify the Errors in Errors in screw thread. T2 screw thread

Explain the process of Measurement of effective diameter. T2

42

Measurement of

effective diameter.

Demonstrate how Angle of thread and thread pitch T2

43 thread angle can be measurement.

measured

44 Describe about Profile Profile thread gauges. T2 thread gauges.

45 Discus the Process Of Best size method. T2 Best size method.

46 Use of machine tool Requirements of machine tool Alignment T2 Alignment Test Test

Describe how Alignment test on Lathe machine, T2

47 Alignment test on Milling machine Lathe machine, Milling

machine can be done

Explain the process Alignment Test On Drilling Machine T2

48 Alignment Test On

Drilling Machine

49 Write the Preparation Preparation of Acceptance Charts T2 of Acceptance Charts

50 Classify the Gear Gear measuring Instruments T2



measuring Instruments

Illustrate the Gear Gear Tooth profile Measurement T2

51 Tooth profile

Measurement

52 Define Pitch Pressure Measurement of Diameter, Pitch Pressure T2 angle angle

Discuss the process of Measurement of tooth thickness T2

53 Measurement of tooth

thickness

54 Classify the types of Types of CMM T2 CMM

55 Discuss the role of Role of CMM CMM

56 List out the Applications of CMM Applications of CMM



Dept. of MECH

10.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Program Outcomes

Objectives A B C D E F G H I J K L M

1 H S S H H H S H

2 S S S

3 H S S S H S

4 H S H

5 H S H H H H

S = Supportive H = Highly Related

10.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO

THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Program Outcomes

Outcomes A B C D E F G H I J K L M

1 S H S H H S H H

2 S H H H H S H H

3 S H S H H S H H

4 S S S S S S S S

5 S S S S S S S S

S = Supportive H = Highly Related



Dept. of MECH

10.11 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

UNIT-1

1. Allowance in limits and fits refers to. [ B ]

a) Axiom clearance between shaft and hole b) Minimum clearance between shaft and

hole

Difference between maximum and minimum size of hole d) Difference between

maximum and

minimum size of shaft

2. The fit on a hole shaft system is specified as 117-s6. The type of fit is [

C ] a) Clearance fit b) Transition fit c) Interference fit d) Wringing fit

The lower limit of shaft is greater than the upper limit of the hole, the fit is.

[ C ]

a) Clearance fit b) Transition fit c) Interference fit d) Wringing fit

4. In the specification of dimensions and fits [ C ]

a) Allowance is equal to the bilateral tolerance b) Allowance is equal to the unilateral

tolerance c) Allowance is independent of tolerance d) Allowance is equal to

the difference between Maximum and Minimum dimension specified by the tolerance.

5. When the clearance between the mating parts are zero, the fit is. [ A ]

a) Slide fit b) Easy Slide fit c) Running fit d) Loose running fit

6. When tolerance is varies only one side of the basic size is called [ B ]

a) Bilateral tolerance b) Unilateral tolerance c) Allowance d) Clearance

7. Prototype meter is made of [ B ]

a) Aluminum b) Platinum and Iridium alloy c) Titanium d) Steel

8. In tail stock which type of fit is used [ A ]

a) Slide fit b) Easy Slide fit c) Running fit d) Loose Running fit

9. What is defined as permissible variation in dimension of a part [ C ]

a) Allowance b) Clearance c) Tolerance d) Limit

The lower limit of shaft is greater than the upper limit of the hole, the fit is. [ C ]

a) Clearance fit b) Transition fit c) Interference fit d) Wringing fit

11. International prototype meter is [ A ]



Dept. of MECH

(a)100cm long (b)102cm long

(c) 38 inches long (d)1cm long 12. Metrology is a science [ B ]

(a) Instruments (b)measurement (c) Length (d)angles

The algebraic difference between the result of measurement and true value of

the

Quantity [ B ] (a) Limit (b) tolerance (c) Error (d) clearance

14. Degree of repeatability of the measuring process [ C ] (a)accuracy (b)limit (c) Precession (d) magnification

15. Following are process of measurement [ D ] (a)measurand (b)reference (c) comparator (d)all the above 16. the standard size for the part and is the same for both the hole and its shaft. [ B ]

(a)Nominal Size (b)Basic Size

(c)Actual Size (d)all the above

17. Differential screw micro meter is used [ A ] (a). To give direct indication of difference between two reading (b). For digital

readout (c). To measure gap between grooves (d). For very high

degree of accuracy Which of the following can be used to scribe lines parallel to the edges of a part

[ C ] (a). Venire calipers (b). Screw gauge (c). Divider (d). Hermaphrodite caliper

The permissible variation in dimension is called as

[ B ] (a)tolerance (b)limit (c)fit (d)all the above 20.for shaft the relationship of deviation with tolerance is given by IT= [

A ] (a)es-ei (b)ES-EI (c)HL-LL (d)es+ei

UNIT-II

1. If a gauge is made as an exact copy of mating part of the component to be

checked, it [ B ]

a) Limit gauge b) Standard gauge c)Work shop gauge d) Inspection gauge

2. When using a micrometer a constant measuring pressure can be obtained by

using the [ B ]

a) Thimble b) Ratchet c) Spindle d)Roughness



Dept. of

MECH

3. Feeler gauge is used for [ B ]

a) Clearance in hole b) Clearance between two mating parts c)Clearance in shaft d)

none

4. Slip gauges are called [ C ]

a) Angle gauges b) feeler gauge c) Gauge blocks d) All the

above

5. Relief holes are provided to reduce the _______ of the sine bar. [ A ]

a) Weight b) Length c) Diameter d) Size

6. Telescopic gauge are used for [ B ]

a) External diameter of hole, slot and grooves b) Internal diameter of hole , slot and

grooves

c) Both A and B d) Any one of the Above

7. A sine bar is specified by

[ B ]

(a). Its total length (b). The centre distance between the two rollers

(c). The size of the rollers (d). The distance between rollers and upper surface

The allowance recommended by B.S.I for wear on solid ring and plug gauge is [

B ]

a) 0.1mmb) 0.005mm c) 0.5mm d) 0.05mm

9. Ring gauges are used for [ D ]

a) Measuring any dimension b) Checking shaft diameter

c) Checking bore diameter d) Measuring outside dimension

Which of the following can be used to scribe lines parallel to the edges of a part [

C ]

a) Vernier callipers b) Screw gauge c) Divider d) Hermaphrodite caliper

11.Dial Indicators are used for [ A ]

(a)Thickness Measurement (b) Height Measurement

(c)Depth Measuremnt (d)Diameter Measurement

12. GO gauge checks the Maximum Material Condition (MMC)

13. NOT-GO gauge checks the Least Material Condition (LMC)

14. In unilateral system; the gauge tolerance zones lie entirely within the [ C ]

(a) Maximum Material Condition (b)Minimum Material Condition


(c)Tolerance Zone ( d) All of the above

Limit Gauges Do not indicate the actual size of the component

16.The following type is not a gauge [ D ]

(a)Ring (b)Snap (c)Plug (d)Scale

17.Snap gauges are used for [ A ]

(a)External dimensions (b)Internal dimensions (c)Threads (d)Taper angle

18.A positional gauge is to check the ------------------------ [ C ]

(a)location (b)height (c)distance (d)length

19.bevel protractor is used to measure the [ A ]

(a)angle (b)straightness (c)flatness (d)parallelism

20.Spirit levels are used to [ D ]

(a)check the level (b)check the thread (c)check the height (d)check the depth

UNIT-III

1. Auto collimator is used to check [ C ] a)

Roughness b) Flatness c) Angle d) Automobile balance

A monochromatic light consists of rays of 5.9x10.7m wavelength.

Interference phenomenon can be observed with all type of wave sources of light.

The fitter gauge interferometer has Roster prism.

Optical flats are made of quartz or silica.

the phenomenon of interaction o light waves is called optical.

Light is a form of energy being propagated by electromagnetic radiation. If the two rays of the same end points meet at some point, a mutual interference will occur. Electromagnetic radiation may be represented by Planks curve.

Type A optical flat has a single working surface.

The parallelism of the working surfaces of type B optical flats can be tested by Fizeau Interferometer method.

12. Optical flats are cylindrical in form with the working with [ A ]

(a)Surfaces Flat (b)Rough Surfaces (C) Smooth surfaces (d)all of the above 13. If the optical flat under test has a perfectly flat surface then the fringes observed will be

straight lines are [ B ]

(a)Perpendicular to each other (b)Parallel to each other

(c) Interfere with each other (d) All of the above Interferometers are optical instruments used for measuring flatness and determining the length of

slip gauges by direct reference to the wavelength of light. 15. This is the oldest type of interferometer [ A ]


(a) Michelson Interferometer (b) N.P.L. Flatness Interferometer (c) Laser Interferometers (d)Talysurf Interfero meter 16.Beam splitters. These, (like partially silvered mirrors) divide the laser beam into separate beams along different axes. 17. As the ACLI measures component travel in the direction of laser beam, and if two are

not coincident, then error called -----------will be introduced [ A ]

(a) Cosine error (b)Sine error (c)Parralax error (d)error

Beam must never be completely blocked by a solid object, These are used to deflect the light beam around corners on its path from the laser to

each axis.[ B ] (a)Beam Reflectors (b)Beam Benders (c)Beam Splitters (d)Interferometer These are used for checking the straightness and flatness of parts in conjunction with

the surface plates and spirit levels [ C ]

(a) Tool Maker’s Microscope (b)Angle Plate (c) V Block (d)optical flat

UNIT-IV

1. The surface irregularities of small wave length are called [ A ]

a) Primary texture b) Secondary texture c) Waviness d) Roughness

2. Secondary texture is also known as Surface waviness Profilometer is measuring for Surface roughness in microns units

Surface Roughness value is 1.6 to 8μm then symbol for this ▼▼ 5. The roughness is also known as [ A ]

(a) primary texture (b) secondary texture (c) both A & B (d) none of the above

6. Surface texture includes. [ C ]

(a) roughness (b) waviness

(c) roughness and waviness (d) none of the above 7. The symbol Ra 8.0(2.5) means surface roughness.

8. The waviness is also called as. [ B ] primary texture (b) secondary texture (c) both A & B (d) none of the above 9. Surface irregularities which occur at infrequent intervals is called Flaw. 10. Profile is defined as the contour of any section through a surface.

11.Lay refers to the predominant direction of the marks visible on the surface.

12.Tomlinson surface meter is a mechanical type equipment 13.Moving coil instrument is mounted above the -------------- [ A ]

(a)Stylus (b)coil (c) magnet (d)table 14. Surface flatness is measured by ---------------------- [ C ]

(a) Micrometer (b) feeler gauge (c) optical flat (d)dial indicator 15.the surface roughness/texture may be obtained by------------------ [ A ]

(a)any production method (b)without removal of material

(c) removal of material by machining (d)by any method 16.for the roughness grade number three, roughness grade symbol consists of -------

[ D ]

(a)four triangles (b)two triangles

(c) Three triangles (d)no triangle

17The roughness value for grade N2 is four.



18.The roughness grade for 50m is 0.05microns

19. Roughness value Ra is given by microns units

20. M-System is a satisfactory means at the point of production

UNIT-V

1. The usual range of magnification obtained in mechanical comparators is [ A ]

a) 250 to 1000 b) 200 to 2000 c) 300 to 1000 d) 350 to 2000

-------------------------- comparators are based on the principle of frequency modulation. [ C ]

a) Mechanical b) Electrical c) Electronic d) Pneumatic

3. The comparator is providing magnification in the range of 500 to 1000, then the comparator is called as [ D ] a) Optical b) Pneumatic c) Differential comparator d) Sigma

The Johansson mikrokator comparator is also called- Twisted strip

The pneumatic gauging is based on Bernoulli’s theory. Optical type of comparator do not require any external agency such as electricity or air. In mechanical comparator the magnification of the small styles movement is obtained by means of levers, gears , etc. In reed type mechanical comparator, the gauging head is usually a sensitive , high quality , dial indicator. Dial indicator is a simplest type of mechanical comparator. 10.Electrical and Electronic comparators depend on their operation on A.C. wheat stone

bridge incorporating galvanometer.

11. If the pitch of the thread is uniform but is longer or shorter than that of its nominal

value the error is called [ B ]

a) Periodic error b) Progressive error c) Drunken error d) Erratic errors

12. In order to measure that all the measurements are made at the same pressure, an -------

indicator is used in measurement of major diameter. [ C ]

a) Dial indicator b) Micrometer indicator c) Fiducial indicator d) Comparator Errors in the flank angle causes a virtual increase in the -------------------- diameter of a bolt and a decrease in that of a nut. [ D ]

a) Major Diameter b) Minor diameter c) Virtual diameter d) Effective diameter

Diameter of Best size wire is equal to (db) = (p/2) sec x

Three wire method can be used to measure Pitch

Flank angle is equal to 1-2 times the thread angle.

Pitch errors in the thread are classified as root, flank, flank angle,1/2 angle.

Thread micrometer can measure pitch of the thread.

The angle of ISO metric thread is 600

If P is the pitch of the thread the best size wire is equal to pitch dia.



10.12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS

OBJECTIVES: This course provides a basic understanding of the wide range of activities encompassed

by personnel working in standards and calibration laboratories. It covers the measurement

process, types and correct use of measurement and test equipment, and measurement

standards. It provides an opportunity for students to learn about measurement uncertainty

and risk analysis. The course includes the procedures necessary to set up and to have

knowledge on calibration.

TUTORIAL 1

LIMITS AND FITS

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

Blooms Course

S.

Taxonomy

Outcome No QUESTION Level

1. Draw a sketch and explain minimum and maximum

Knowledge 2

metal conditions of shaft and hole.

2. Discuss complete classification of fits. Explain them

comprehension 2

with the help of suitable examples.

3. List out the types of assemblies. Knowledge 3

4. Illustrate the need of limit system Application 2

5. Determine about allowance and Tolerance Evaluation 2

6. Define MML Knowledge 1

7. How is a fundamental tolerance represented. Knowledge 1

8. Define limit Knowledge 1

9. What are the two systems of writing tolerance . Knowledge 2

10. What are the types of assemblies. Knowledge 2


LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1. Explain about the types of assemblies comprehension 2

2 Interpret the meaning of following type of fit :

Knowledge 2

(i) H7f6 (ii) H7v5 (iii) H7r6 (iv) H7h6

3. Explain unilateral and bilateral tolerance system with

comprehension 2

a neat diagram

4. Describe the term normal size, deviation, upper

Remember 1 deviation and lower deviation.

A 50mm diameter shaft to made to rotate in a bush.

The tolerance for both shaft and bush are 0.05mm.

2 5. Determine the dimension of shaft and bush to give a Evaluation

maximum clearance of 0.075mm with the hole basis

system.

In a hole and shaft assembly of 30mm nominal size

the tolerance for hole and shaft are as specified

below: Hole having upper limit as +0.02 and lower

6. limit as -0.00mm Shaft having upper limit as –

Evaluation 2

0.04mm and lower limit as – 0.07mm: Determine (i)

maximum and minimum clearance obtained (ii)

allowance (iii) hole and shaft tolerance (iv) MML of

shaft and hole (v) type of fit.

A hole and a mating shaft are to have a nominal size

assembly size of 40mm. the assembly is to have maxim

7. clearance of 0.15mm and minimum clearance of 0.05m

Evaluation 2

The hole tolerance is 1.5 times the shaft tolerance. Det

the limits for both hole and shaft by using hole basis an

shaft basis system.

Between two mating parts of 100mm basic size the act

interference fit is to from 0.05 and 0.12mm. The tolera

Evaluation 2 8. for hole is the same as the tolerance of shaft. Find the s

oth the shaft and the hole (a) hole basis unilateral syste

shaft basis unilateral system.

9. Draw a conventional diagram of limits and fits and

explainall the terms involved in it

10. Explain how hole, shaft and fit are designed? explain comprehension 2

withsuitable example

Page 63


UNIT II

LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENTS


Explain the working mechanism of a dial indicator

Comprehension 2 1. with neat diagram.

2. State the principle of the spirit level. Knowledge 1

3. Show weather the new taper of a plug gauge is

Application 2

measured using sine bar.

4. Explain the principle of a sine bar. Comprehension 2

5. Examine the working mechanism of a dial indicator

Analysis 3

with neat diagram.

6. How is length specified in a sine bar Knowledge 1

7. Why is a plug gauge used Knowledge 1

8. Slip gauges are also called as what Knowledge 2

9. What is meant by wringing in slip gauges Knowledge 2

10. What is the use of a telescope gauge. Knowledge 2


A hole and shaft system had the following dimension

60 H8/c8. The multiplier of grade 8 is 25. The

Evaluation 2 1. fundamental deviation for “c” shaft is –(9.5+.08D).

the diameter step is 50-80. Design the suitable “GO”

and “NO-GO” gauge for shaft and hole..

Design the general type GO and NOGO gauge for a

component having 25H7/f8 fit. Fundamental

2. deviation of “f” shaft=-5.5D

0.41 25mm falls in the Evaluation 2

diameter step of 18 and 30. Take wear allowance of

8% of the gauge tolerance and determine (a) types of

fit (b) allowance

3. A 100mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33

0 Evaluation 2

determine the sip gauge needed from 87 pieces set.

4. How is an angle of 33

0-9

’-15” is to be measured with

Analysis 1

the help of the following standard gauges ?

5. Explain the types of snap gauge with diagram. comprehension 2



6. Give the complete classification of taper gauges with

Remember 1 the help of neat diagram.

7. What is wringing? What precautions must take while Knowledge 2 wringing slip gauges?

How do you measure external dovetail, internal

1 8. dovetail and angle of dovetail with the help of Analysis

precision balls and rollers.

9. Explain the construction and working of an optical comprehension 2 bevel protractor with neat diagram

10. Explain in detail about plug gauge and snap gauge comprehension 2

UNIT III

OPTICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENTS AND FLAT SURFACE

MEASUREMENTS

SHORT ANSWERS

1. What is an optical flat? Knowledge 2

2. Explain the procedure for flatness measurement on comprehension 2

surface plate.

3. Determine the principle of an autocollimator with Evaluation 2

neat diagram

Illustrste some applications of a Tool marker’s Application 4

4. microscope.

5. What is the principal of autocollimeter Knowledge 2

6. Draw a line diagram of NPL interferometer Remember 1

7. List out some applications of a Tool marker’s

Remember 1 Microscope

Draw a neat diagram how an auto collimator is represented

9. What material is used for optical flats Knowledge 2

10. Explain the use of type A optical flat comprehension 2




1. Explain with neat diagram an optical flat comprehension 2

2. Which prism is used in fitter gauge interferometer

explain?

3. Explain the flat surface measurements. comprehension 2

4. What is the use of a surface plate explain? Knowledge 2

5. Describe in detain the working of an Knife Edge. Remember 1

6. With a neat diagram illustrate an autocollimeter and

its working principal.

7. Explain the NPL interferometer construction. comprehension 2

8. Describe the importance of an optical projector. Remember 1

9. List out the different optical instruments and explain

Remember 1 them.

10. What are the applications and advantages of an Knowledge 2

optical projector.

UNIT IV

SURFACE ROUGHNESS MEASUREMENT


1. What is the ISI symbol for indication of surface Knowledge 1 finish?

2. Define waviness Knowledge 1

3. What are the methods used for evaluating the surface Knowledge 2 finish?

How will you represent it , The surface finish on the m

4. surface is not to exceed 5micro meter Ra with a cutoff

Analysis 1

length 2mm machining allowance 0.5mm and direction

lay parallel.

5. Define the Term Primary Texture Knowledge 1

6. What are the different types of Lay. Knowledge 2



Dept. of

MECH

7. What is Form Factor Knowledge 2

8. Explain the Principle of Profilometer. comprehension 2

9. How CLA index number is determined? Knowledge 1

10. Draw the Diagram of Surface Texture showing all

Remember 1 the elements


Determine CLA & RMS values, the measurement of

surface roughness heights of successive 10 peaks and Evaluation 2

1. troughs were measured from a datum and were

22,30,45,56,15,55,35,40 microns. If these

measurement were obtained on 15mm length

2. Explain the working and usage of Talysurf in surface comprehension 2

roughness measurement.

3. Explain the method of measurement of surface finish comprehension 2

using profilograph with neat diagram.

4. Explain the working of Tomlinson Surface Meter comprehension 2

with neat diagram.

5. 10. Explain the following terms? comprehension 2

i. Roughness ii. Waviness iii. lay.

Explain the roughness indices terms Ra or CLA, Rz comprehension 2

6. and RMS values in numerical assessment of

roughness.

Determine CLA & RMS values, In the measurement

of surface roughness heights of successive 10 peaks Evaluation 2

7. and troughs were measured from a datum and were

33,25,30,19,22,18,27,29,20 microns. If these

measurement were obtained on 10mm length

8. Explain the construction and working of a comprehension 2

profilograph for surface roughness measurement.

9. Explain the working of profilometer with neat

comprehension 2 diagram.

The heights of peak and valleys of 22 Successive

points on a surface are 32, 28, 41, 24, 35, 19, 31, 21,

10. 40, 18, 44, 24, 41, 25, 40, 26,35,18, 40, 18, 39, 21 Evaluation 2

microns respectively, measured over a length of

20mm. Determine CLA and RMS values of

roughness surface? Page 67


UNIT V SCREW THREAD MEASUREMENT AND MEASUREMENT THROUGH

COMPARATORS AND GEAR MEASUREMENT AND MACHINE TOOL

ALIGNMENT TESTS


Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of sigma comprehension 1

1. comparator.

2. What is CMM? Knowledge 4

3. Write the types of coordinate measuring machines comprehension 2

4. list out the advantages and disadvantages of pneumatic

Remember 1

5. Define Periodic error Knowledge 1

6. State the advantages of mechanical comparator Knowledge 1

7. Define the term Runout Knowledge 1

8. Mention the application of CMM. Remember 1

9. List the various geometrical checks made on machine

Remember 1 tools

10. What are the characteristics expected for a Knowledge 2

comparator


What is meant by best size wire? Derive the

1. expression for the same in terms of the pitch and Knowledge 2

angle of the thread? Explain the terms involved in the

expression?

2. Explain about pneumatic comparator and their uses comprehension 2 in mass production with neat diagram?

3. Describe Briefly coordinate measuring machine

Remember 1 (CMM).

4. What is meant by Alignment Test On machine Tool? Knowledge 2 Why they are necessary? Explain

5. Describe with neat sketches three-wire method of

Remember 1 measuring the effective diameter of a screw thread?

6. What is gear pitch? Describe any method of Knowledge 2 measuring gear pitch

8. List the different elements required to be measured in

Remember 1 order to determine the accuracy of screw thread



Dept. of

MECH

9. With the help of a neat sketch explain the comprehension 2 construction of reed type of comparator?

10. Describe with neat sketches two-wire method of Remember

1 measuring the effective diameter of a screw thread?

10.13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

ASSIGNMENT- I

LIMTS AND FITS


S. Blooms

Course Taxonomy

No

Outcome QUESTION

Level

1.

How is a fundamental tolerance represented.

Knowledge 1

2

What are the two systems of writing tolerance .

Comprehension 1

3 List out the suitable examples of clearance fit. Knowledge 1

4 Calculate the upper and lower limit of 25 +0.05

+0.00 Evaluate 2

5

Draw a neat diagram representing tolerance .

Knowledge 1

6

Draw a conventional diagram of limits and fits.

Knowled 1

7

Differentiate between tolerance and allowance.

Analysis 1

8

Define a)allowance b) Tolerance

Knowledge 1

9

What are the types of assemblies.

Comprehension 1

10

How is a fundamental deviation represented.

Knowledge 1


1. Differentiate between Hole basis and shaft basis

2 Comprehension system with diagram.

2. State the principle features of international

2 Knowledge standard systems of limits and fits.

3. Give the complete classification of fits. Explain

3 Application them with the help of suitable examples.

4. Explain about the types of assemblies.

Comprehension 2

5. Determine about the tolerance system with neat Evaluation 2

Page 69


diagram.

6. With the help of suitable diagram explain Knowledge 1 minimum and maximum metal conditions of shaft

and hole.

7. Examine the need of limit system.

Application 2

8. Define allowance and Tolerance.

Knowledge 1

A 50mm diameter shaft to made to rotate in a

bush. The tolerance for both shaft and bush are 2

9 0.05mm. Determine the dimension of shaft and Evaluation

bush to give a maximum clearance of 0.075mm

with the hole basis syatem.

10 Explain the difference between interference and

Comprehension 2

selective assembly.

ASSIGNMENT- II

LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENTS


S. Blooms

Course QUESTION

Taxonomy

No

Outcome Level

1 List out the types of gauges. Knowledge 1

2 Define Taylor’s principle of gauge design. Knowledge 1

List out the two standard systems of linear Knowledge

1

3 measurement.

4 Explain the use of a telescope gauge. Comprehension 2

5 What is the use of a relief holes in a sine bar. Knowledge 4

6 Define line standard and end standard. Knowledge 1

7 What are the different grades of slip gauges. Knowledge 4

8 Explain the principle does a Sine bar work. Comprehension 2

9 What is meant by wringing in slip gauges. Knowledge 4

10 Explain the use of feeler gauge. Comprehension 2




1. Explain the construction and working of an optical Comprehension 2

bevel protractor with neat diagram.

2. Describe new taper of a plug gauge is measured Comprehension 2

using sine bar.

3. Give the complete classification of taper gauges Application 3

with the help of neat diagram.

4. What are the different grades of slip gauges? Knowledge 1

Explain?

5. Determine the working mechanism of a dial Evaluation 2

indicator with neat diagram.

6. Describe the principle of the spirit level.

Knowledge 2

7. Explain the Taylor’s principle of gauge design.

Comprehension 2

8. Explain the principle of a sine bar

Analyze 4

A hole and shaft system had the following

dimension 60 H8/c8. The multiplier of grade 8 is

9 25. The fundamental deviation for “c” shaft is –

Evaluation 1 (9.5+.08D). the diameter step is 50-80. Design the

suitable “GO” and “NO-GO” gauge for shaft and

hole..

10 Explain the manufacturing method for slip gauges Comprehension 2

and how they calibrate?

ASSIGNMENT-3

OPTICAL MESURING INSTRUMENTS


S. Blooms

Course

QUESTION Taxonomy No Outcome

Level

1. What is the principle of an auto collimator. Knowledge 4

2 Define optical. Knowledge 1

3 Which prism is used in fitter gauge interferometer . Knowledge 4

4 List out some applications of a Tool marker’s Knowledge 1

microscope.



Dept. of

MECH

5 Draw a line diagram of NPL interferometer. Knowledge 1

6 Explain the use of type A optical flat Comprehension 2

7 What is the use of a tool maker’s microscope. Knowledge 4

8 Draw a neat diagram how an auto collimator is Knowledge 1

represented.

9 Explain the use of an optical projector. Comprehension 2

10 What material is used for optical flats. Knowledge 4


Explain the formation of interference fringes when

1. light falls on an optical flat resting on a lapped Comprehension 2

surface.

2. What is a straight edge? Explain how it can be used Knowledge 1

to measure the straightness?

3. Explain the procedure for flatness measurement on Comprehension 2

surface plate.

4. Explain about the NPL flatness interferometer.

Analyze 4

5. What is an optical flat? Explain with neat diagram?

Knowledge 1

6. Explain about the optical projector with neat figure.

Analyze 4

7. Explain the principle of an autocollimator with neat Comprehension 2

diagram.

8. List out some applications of a Tool marker’s micros

Knowledge 1

Explain the formation of interference fringes when Comprehension 2

9. light falls on an optical flat resting on a curved

surface.

10. Explain how Auto Collimator can be used to measure Analyze 4

Flateness

Page 72


Dept. of MECH

ASSIGNMENT-IV


Blooms Course

S. No QUESTION

Taxonomy Outcome

Level

1. Define fullness and emptiness in form factor. Knowledge 1

2 What are the methods used for evaluating the Knowledge 1

surface finish?

How will you represent it , The surface finish on

3 the milled surface is not to exceed 5micro meter Ra Evaluation 1

with a cutoff length 2mm machining allowance

0.5mm and direction of lay parallel..

4 Explain the Term Primary Texture. Comprehension 2

5 Sketch The Conventional representation of Surface

Evaluation

Roughness

6 Explain the Principle of Profilometer. Comprehension 2

7 Define the Term Secondary Texture. Knowledge 1

8 How CLA index number is determined? Knowledge 1

9 What are the stylus probe instruments? Knowledge 4

10 What is Form Factor Knowledge 4


1. Explain about the Taylor-Hobson ‘Talysurf’ with

2 Comprehension neat diagram.

2. Explain the method of measurement of surface

2 Comprehension

finish using profilograph with neat diagram.

Define the following terms with neat diagram.

3. (a) Roughness (b) Waviness (c) Lay and its

Knowledge

1

different types

Make a comparative study of CLA, RMS and ten

4. point height method of measurement of surface

2 Comprehension

finish with the help of an example. Explain the

difference.



In the measurement of surface roughness heights of

successive 10 peaks and troughs were measured 4

5.

from a datum and were 22,30,45,56,15,55,35,40

Analyze

microns. If these measurement were obtained on

15mm length. Determine CLA & RMS values.

In the measurement of surface roughness heights of

successive 10 peaks and troughs were measured 4

6.

from a datum and were 33,25,30,19,22,18,27,29,20

Analyze

microns. If these measurement were obtained on

10mm length. Determine CLA & RMS values.

The surface finish on the milled surface is not to

7. exceed 5micro meter Ra with a cutoff length 2mm 4

Analyze

machining allowance 0.5mm and direction of lay

parallel. How will you represent it .

8. What is the ISI symbol for indication of surface finis

Knowledge 1

9

State the Reasons for Controlling Surface Texture.

Knowledge 1

10 Differentiate between Primary Texture and Secondar Comprehension 2 Texture.

ASSIGNMENT- V


S. QUESTION

Blooms Course

No

Taxonomy Level Outcome

1 Classify the comparator according to the principles

Application 2 used for obtaining magnification.

2 List out the types of coordinate measuring machines

Knowledge

1

3 List out the Different types of Mechanical

Knowledge 1

Comparators.

4 Mention the application of CMM. Application 2

5 What do you mean by alignment test on machine

Knowledge 1

tools?

6 List the various geometrical checks made on

Knowledge 1

machine tools.



Dept. of MECH

7 Describe the characteristics expected for a

Knowledge 1

comparator.

8 Explain the effect of flank angle error? Comprehension 2

9 Discuss about best size of wire? Knowledge 1

10 Define Drunken Error Knowledge 1


Explain about the reed type mechanical comparator

Comprehension 2

1.

with neat diagram?

2. Explain about pneumatic comparator and their uses

Comprehension

2 in mass production with neat diagram?

3. Explain about sigma comparator with a neat Comprehension 2 diagram?

4. Illustrate about the electrical and electronic Application 2 comparator with neat diagram

5. List the different elements required to be measured Knowledge 1 in order to determine the accuracy of screw thread

6. List out some of the screw tread terminology with Knowledge 1 neat diagram?

7. Determine the Flank angle of a screw thread? Evaluation 1

What is meant by best size wire? Derive the

8. expression for the same in terms of the pitch and 2

angle of the thread? Explain the terms involved in Comprehension

the expression?

9 Explain the measurement technique for pitch Comprehension 2 pressure angle of a gear.

10 How do you measure the thickness of the tooth of a Comprehension 2 gear? Explain.



11. REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING

COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Title REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING

Course Code A60334

Regulation R-16

Course Structure

Lectures Tutorials Practicals Credits

4 0 0 4

Course Coordinator Mr. Shravan Kumar,Asst.Professor

Team of Instructors Mr. Shravan Kumar, Asst.Professor

COURSE OVERVIEW:

PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

UG 4 4 Physics, Maths&

Thermodynamics

COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS:



Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests): There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm

examination consists of one objective paper, one

subjective paper and four assignments. The objective

paper is for 10 marks and subjective paper is for 10

marks, with duration of 1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for

objective and 60 minutes for subjective paper). Objective

paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice questions, fill-

in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper contains of 4

full questions (one from each unit) of which, the student

has to answer 2 questions, each question carrying 5 marks.

75

100

Refrigeration and air conditioning continues to grow in importance in every segment of our day-

to-day living. The course covers various conventional refrigeration systems like air, vapour

compression, vapour absorption and steam jet refrigeration systems, also describes some

unconventional refrigeration systems; thermoelectric refrigeration, Hilsch tube, etc.. The course

introduces the psychometry, various air conditioning systems and heat pump circuits.




First midterm examination shall be conducted for 2.5 units

of syllabus and second midterm examination shall be

conducted for another 2.5 units. 5 marks are allocated for

Assignments. First two assignments should be submitted

before the conduct of the first mid, and the second two

assignments should be submitted before the conduct of the

second mid. The total marks secured by the student in

each midterm examination are evaluated for 25 marks,

and the average of the two midterm examinations shall be

taken as the final marks secured by each candidate.

b) Expected Learning Outcomes and Methods for Assessing

S. No Expected Learning Outcomes Assessment method (s)

a

To understand how thermodynamic principles are applied within the

refrigeration and air conditioning

Assignments

Midterm and University examinations

b

To understand how different

components of refrigerator and air

conditioner work

Assignments


c To understand vapour absorption refrigeration system operation

Assignments Midterm and University examinations

d

To analyze the Psychometric processes

and determine the cooling load

calculations.

Assignments


e To understand air conditioning systems and heat pumps

Assignments Midterm and University examinations



2 I Assignment lot 5 TOTAL 25


4 I Assignment lot 5 TOTAL 25

MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2 MID’s TOTAL

5 EXTERNAL Examination 3 hours 75 GRAND TOTAL 100



BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

BL 1: Remember / Knowledge BL 2: Understanding BL 3: Apply



11.5 Mapping of Course Objectives Vs. Course Outcomes

S.No Course Objectives Course Outcomes Blooms

Level

1

To understand how thermodynamic

principles are applied within the

refrigeration and air conditioning

An ability to determine the COP

of VCRS

BL1

2

To understand how different

components of refrigerator and air

conditioner work

An ability to describe and

selecta component to meet

desired need of refrigeration

BL2

3

To understand vapour absorption

refrigeration system operation An ability to derive,formulate

and solve problems on vapour

absorption refrigeration systems

BL3

4

To analyze the Psychometric

processes and determine the cooling

load calculations.

An Ability to evaluate the

psychrometricproperties and to

perform load calculations

BL4

5

To understand air conditioning

systems and heat pumps

An ability to illustrate the

psychometric processes and

demonstrate various heat pump

circuits

BL5

Program Outcomes

Level Proficiency

assessed by Bloom’s Level

A

Graduates will demonstrate the ability to use

basic knowledge in mathematics, science and


specific to Mechanical

Engineering (Fundamental engineering

analysis skills)

S

Solving Gate and

text book problems

Apply

B

Graduates will demonstrate the ability to

design and conduct experiments, interpret and

analyze data, and report results (Information

retrieval skills).

H

Solving Gate and

text book problems

Remember

Understand

Apply

C


design any mechanical systems that meets

desired specifications and

requirements (Creative skills).

H

Assignment & Gate

questions

Design

Create

D Graduates will demonstrate the ability to

function as a coherent unit in

multidisciplinary design teams, and deliver

S Mini & Micro

projects

Create



results through collaborative


E


identify, formulate and solve mechanical

engineering problems of a complex


S

Micro projects

models / Gate

questions

Analyze

Evaluate

F

Graduates will demonstrate an understanding

of their professional and ethical

responsibilities, and use technology for the

benefit of mankind (Professional integrity).

N

---------

Understand

Adopt

G Graduates will be able to communicate

effectively in both verbal and written

forms (Speaking / writing skills).

N Micro projects

models / Gate

questions

Design

Create

H

Graduates will have the confidence to apply

engineering solutions in global and national

contexts (Engineering impact assessment

skills).

N

Assignment & Gate

questions

Analyze

Evaluate

I Graduates should be capable of self-education

and clearly understand the value of life-long

learning (Continuing education awareness).

H Class test &

seminar

Evaluate

J

Graduates will develop an open mind and

have an understanding of the impact of

engineering on society and demonstrate

awareness of contemporary issues (Social

awareness).

N

Seminars

Organize

K

Graduates will be familiar with applying

software methods and modern computer tools

to analyze mechanical engineering

problems (Software hardware interface).

N

Class test & Group

activity in class

room

Solve

Analyze

L

Graduates will have the ability to recognize

the importance of professional development

by pursing post graduate studies or face

competitive examinations that offer

challenging and rewarding careers in

Mechanical Engineering (Successful career

and immediate employment).

S

GATE

Develop

M

Students will be able to design a system to

meet desired needs within environmental,

economic, political, ethical health and safety,

manufacturability and management

knowledge and techniques to estimate time,

resources to complete project (Practical

engineering analysis skills)

N

Text book problems

as part of

Assignments

Evaluate

Solve

N

Students will be able to work professionally

in both thermal and mechanical systems

areas.

S

Placements

Develop




Vapor Absorption refrigeration - Description and working of ammonia -water, Li Br - water

system - Calculation of HCOP, Principle and operation of three fluid vapour absorption

refrigeration system.

Air refrigeration- Bell Coleman cycle - open and dense air system - ideal and actual refrigeration

- applications - steam jet refrigeration system -working principle - basic operation

UNIT — IV:

Introduction to Refrigeration: -Basic concepts - Unit of refrigeration and C.O.P-

refrigerators- heat pump- carnot refrigerator-applications of refrigerator

Vapour compression refrigeration- Ideal cycle -effect of sub cooling of liquid- super

heating of vapour-deviations of practical (actual cycle) from ideal cycle- construction

and use of P-H chart- problems.

UNIT - V:

Air Conditioning systems: Classification of equipment, cooling, heating humidification and

dehumidification, filters, grills and registers, deodorants, fans and blowers.

Heat Pump - Heat sources - different heat pump circuits - Applications.

SYLLABUS:

UNIT — I

Introduction to Air Conditioning: Psychometric Properties & Processes - Sensible and latent heat loads –

Characterization - Need for Ventilation, Consideration of Infiltration - Load concepts of RSHF, ASHF, ESHF

and ADP.

Concept of human comfort and effective temperature -Comfort Air conditioning - Industrial air

conditioning and Requirements -Air conditioning Load Calculations.

UNIT — II

Components: Compressors -classification - Working - Advantages and Disadvantages.

Condensers - classification - Working Principles

Evaporators - classification - Working Principles

Expansion devices - Types - Working Principles

UNIT III:

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning / CP Arora / TMH. 2. A Course in Refrigeration and Air Conditioning / SC Arora &Domkundwar / Dhanpatrai.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Principles of Refrigeration /Dossat / Pearson Education. 2. Basic Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning/ Ananthanarayanan / TMH.

3. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning/ Manohar Prasad/ New Age.



COURSE PLAN:

Lecture

No.

Level

Course Learning Outcomes

Course

Learnin

g

Outcom

es

Topics to be

covered

Reference

1

L2

By the End of the session student

will understand basic concepts of

Refrigeration

a

Introduction to

Refrigeration

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/1

T1


will be able to Examine the

components of a refrigeration system

2

L1


will be able to understand types of

compressors

a, c

Components:

Compressors –

classification

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/4

T1 By the End of the session student

will be able to differentiate the

various types of compressors.

3

L1

By the End of the session student will be able to understand working

of compressor

a,b

Compressors

working

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/20

T1


will be able to compare various

compressors

4

L1


will be able to understand working

of compressor

c

Compressors

working

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/20

T1


will be able to compare various

compressors

5

L5


will be able to differentiate various

types of compressors

b,c

Compressors

Advantages and

Disadvantages

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/20

T1


will be able to Differentiate stages

of compression

6

L1


will be able to understand basic

concepts of condensers

d

Condensers –

classification

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/26

T1 & T2 By the End of the session student


types of condensers

7

L1 By the End of the session student


of condenser

e Condensers

Working

Principles

T1

http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105128/1





















will be able to judge the method of

condensation.

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/26

8

L1


of condenser

a,e

Condensers

Working

Principles

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/26

T1 & T2



condensation.

9

L1


will be able to understand Principles

of evaporator

a

Evaporators –

classification

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/28



types of evaporators

10

L1



of evaporator

a, c

Evaporators

Working

Principles

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/28

T1 & T2



evaporation.

11

L1


of evaporator

a,b

Evaporators

Working

Principles

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/28

T1



evaporation.

12

L5


will be able to understand various

types of expansion devices

c

Expansion

devices types

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/31



types of Expansion devices

13

L1



of expansion devices

b,c

Expansion

devices working

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/31



expansion

14

L3



Refrigeration

d

Unit of

refrigeration and

C.O.P-

refrigerators

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

T1 & T2


will be able to Evaluate the COPof

refrigeration system


























28/5

15

L3


will be able to understand a heat

pump

e

heat pump

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/5

T1 & T2

By the End of the session student will be able to calculate the COP of

heat pump

16

L3


will be able to understand a carnot

refrigerator

a,e

carnot

refrigerator

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/10

T1 & T2

By the End of the session student will be able to analyze a carnot

refrigerator

17

L2

By the End of the session student will be able to understand concept

of working of refrigerator

a

applications of

refrigerator

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/10

T1 & T2


will be able to apply the concepts of

refrigeration

18

L2


will be able to understand VCRS

a, c

Vapour

compression

refrigeration

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/Webcou

rse-

contents/IIT%20

Kharagpur/Ref%

20and%20Air%

20Cond/pdf/RA

C%20Lecture%

2010.pdf

T1


will be able to analyze VCRS for

various states of refrigerant

19

L5


will be able to understand ideal

VCRS cycle

a,b

Ideal cycle

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/10

T1


will be able to differentiate ideal

and actual VCRS cycle

20

L4


will be able to understand effect of

sub cooling

c

effect of sub

cooling of liquid

nptel.ac.in/cours

es/112105129/p

df/RAC%20Lect

ure%2010.pdf

T1


will be able to apply the state of sub

cooling of refrigerant

21

L4 By the End of the session student will be able to understand effect of

sub cooling

b,c effect of sub

cooling of liquid

nptel.ac.in/cours

T1











http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Ref%20and%20Air%20Cond/pdf/RAC%20Lecture%2010.pdf















will be able to apply the state of sub

cooling of refrigerant

es/112105129/p

df/RAC%20Lect

ure%2010.pdf

22

L2



super heating

d

super heating of

vapour

nptel.ac.in/cours

es/112105129/p

df/RAC%20Lect

ure%2010.pdf


will be able to apply the state of

super heating of refrigerant

23

L2



super heating

e

super heating of

vapour

nptel.ac.in/cours

es/112105129/p

df/RAC%20Lect

ure%2010.pdf


will be able to apply the state of

super heating of refrigerant

24

L3


will be able to recall the concepts of

VCRS

a,e

Problems on Sub

cooling and

super heating

nptel.ac.in/cours

es/112105129/p

df/RAC%20Lect

ure%2010.pdf

T1


will be able to evaluate the COP of

VCRS

25

L1


will be able to understand ideal and

actual VCRS

a

deviations of

practical (actual

cycle) from

ideal cycle

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/Webcou

rse-

contents/IIT%20

Kharagpur/Ref%

20and%20Air%

20Cond/pdf/RA

C%20Lecture% 2013.pdf

T1


will be able to apply differentiate

deviations of ideal and actual VCRS

26

L2


will be able to understand P-H chart

a, c

construction and

use of P-H chart

nptel.ac.in/cours

es/112105129/p

df/RAC%20Lect

ure%2010.pdf


will be able to appraise the

properties of refrigerant from P-H

chart












27

L2



VAR

a,b

Simple VARS –

Description

Actual VARS

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/14


will be able to Examine the

components of a absorption

refrigeration system

28

L2


will be able to calculate the COP of

VAR

c

Calculation of

HCOP &

Advantages of

VARS

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/15

T1 & T2


will be able to illustrate the

advantages of VAR

29

L3



of Li br refrigeration System

b,c

Li Br – water

system

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/15

T1 & T2


will be able to compare the three

fluid and two Fluid System

30

L1


will be able to explain the working

of three fluid system

d

Principle &

operation of 3

fluid VAR

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/19

T1 & T2

By the End of the session student will be able to compare the three

fluid and two Fluid System

31

L1


will be able to understand the

working of Air refrigeration System

e

Air refrigeration – Reversed

carnot cycle

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/9


will be able to Differentiate

between Carnot cycle and reversed

Cycle

32

L2


will be able to understand bell

Coleman Cycle

a,e

Air refrigeration – Bell Coleman

Cycle

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/9


will be able to differentiate

between Reversed carnot Cycle and

Bell Coleman Cycle

33

L3


will be able to Discuss about the

open and closed system

a

Open & dense

air system

http://nptel.ac.in/

T1 & T2

























will be able to judge the open and

dense systems

courses/1121051

28/9

34

L3


will be able to calculate the

efficiency of carnot cycle

a, c

Problems on

Carnot Cycle

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/9

T1 & T2

By the End of the session student will be able to judge why carnot

cycle is called as Ideal cycle

35

L3


will be able to List out the

Assumptions in Ideal Cycle

a,b

Ideal and actual

refrigeration –

applications

nptel.ac.in/cours

es/112105129/p

df/RAC%20Lect

ure%209.pdf


will be able to summarize the

Processes in Actual cycle

36

L2



of steam jet refrigeration System

c

Steam jet

refrigeration –

working

principle

www.nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121061

33/Module_6/9_

Steam_Jet_RS.p

df


will be able to analyze the T-s Chart

for steam jet refrigeration System

37

L2


will be able to List out the

Components of a steam jet

refrigeration System

b,c

Operation of

steam jet

refrigeration

www.nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121061

33/Module_6/9_

Steam_Jet_RS.p

df

T2


will be able to Evaluate the

Performance Characteristics

38

L2



VAR

d

Psychometric

properties &

processes

-Sensible

Heating and

Sensible Cooling

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/34


will be able to measure the rate of

Heat Absorption and Rejection

39



VAR

e Psychometric

properties &

processes-

T1 & T2






http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/112106133/Module_6/9_Steam_Jet_RS.pdf
















will be able to measure the rate of

Heat Absorption and Rejection

Humidification

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/34

40

L2



Psychometry

a,e

Psychometric

properties &

processes-

Dehumidificatio

n

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/34

T1 & T2


will be able to relate the

psychometric properties

41

L3


will be able to Understand the concept of Humidification process

a

Psychometric

properties &

processes

Problems-

Heating and

humidification

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/34

T1 & T2


will be able to Show the

humidification Process in

Psychometric chart

42

L3


will be able to Understand the

concept of De Humidification

process

a, c

Psychometric

properties &

processes

Problems-

Cooling and De

humidification

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/39


will be able to differentiate

Humidification and De-

Humidification

43

L3

By the End of the session student will be able to Predict the effect of

Humidification

a,b

Sensible &

Latent heat load

---

characterization

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/39


will be able to differentiate heating

and Humidification

44

L3

By the End of the session student will be able to Predict the effect of

De Humidification

c

Need for

ventilation,

Consideration of

infiltration

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/39


will be able to differentiate Cooling

and De-Humidification

45

L4


will be able to calculate the Sensible

heat Load

b,c

Load concepts

of SHF

http://nptel.ac.in/

T1 & T2























will be able to Measure total Heat

Input to the system

courses/1121051

28/39

46

L3


will be able to Discuss the need for

Ventilation

d

Load concepts

of RSHF,

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/39

T1 & T2

By the End of the session student will be able to Measure the Load of

infiltration

47

L3


will be able to understand Concept

of SHF

e

Load concepts

of ESHF

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/39

T1 & T2


will be able to calculate the SHF

48

L4


will be able to discuss the RSHF

a,e

Load concepts

of GSHF, ADP

– Problems

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/39


will be able to Relate the SHF and

RSHF

49

L4


will be able to understand Concept

of ESHF

a

Concept of

human comfort

& effective temp

– comfort air

conditioning

http://www.nptel

.ac.in/courses/11

2105129/pdf/R&

AC%20Lecture %2033.pdf

T1 & T2


will be able to Relate the RSHF and

ESHF

50

L1


will be able to calculate the GSHF

a, c

Industrial air

conditioning &

requirements

textofvideo.nptel

.iitm.ac.in/11210

5128/lec1.pdf

T2


will be able to Relate GSHF and

RSHF

51

L2


will be able to Understand the

concept of human Comfort

a,b

Air Conditioning

systems

textofvideo.nptel

.iitm.ac.in/11210

5128/lec1.pdf

T2


will be able to Determine Human

Comfort Conditions













http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/112105129/pdf/R%26AC%20Lecture%2033.pdf







52

L2


will be able to Generalize the need

of industrial A/C

c

summer and

winter air-

conditioning,

Humidification

and de-

humidification

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/42

T2


will be able to Prescribe the

Industrial Requirements for A/C

53

L3


will be able to calculate the Total air

Conditioning Load

b,c

Filters, Grills &

registers

http://www.nptel

.ac.in/courses/11

2105129/pdf/R&



will be able to Propose the A/C

Specifications required for a Room

54

L3


will understand basic concepts of air

conditioning systems

d

Fans and

blowers

http://www.nptel

.ac.in/courses/11

2105129/pdf/R&



will be able to Evaluate the COP of

air conditioning systems

55

L2

By the End of the session student will be able to understand concepts

of summer winter air conditioning

e

Fans and

blowers

http://www.nptel

.ac.in/courses/11

2105129/pdf/R&

AC%20Lecture

%2036.pdf


will be able to illustrate the

humidification and de-

humidification process

56

L2


will be able to understand filters

grills and registers

a,e

Heat pump,

Heat pump

circuits

http://nptel.ac.in/

courses/1121051

28/44

T2


will be able to find the applications

of filters and registers

57

L2

By the End of the session student will be able to understand concept

of working of fans and blowers

a

Heat pump,

Heat pump

circuits

www.nptel.ac.in/

courses/1031070

94/module6/lect

ure3/lecture3.pdf


will be able to apply the concepts of

fans and blowers

58


will be able to understand a heat

pump

e Applications

www.nptel.ac.in/

courses/1031070

T2






















http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/103107094/module6/lecture3/lecture3.pdf









will be able to design a heat pump

circuit

94/module6/lect

ure3/lecture3.pdf

59

L3

By the End of the session student will be able to understand

applications of heat pumps

e

Problems on

heat pumps

www.nptel.ac.in/

courses/1031070

94/module6/lect

ure3/lecture3.pdf

T2


will be able to differentiate heat

pump circuits

60

L3

By the End of the session student will be able to understand formulae

used for heat pump circuits

e

Problems on

heat pumps

www.nptel.ac.in/

courses/1031070

94/module6/lect

ure3/lecture3.pdf

T2

By the End of the session student will be able to apply and solve for

problems on heat pump circuits

MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE

ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Objectives

Program Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

I H S H H H S H

II H H H H H H H H

III S H S S H S S

IV H S S S H S S

V H H H H H S H

S=Supportive H=Highly Related

MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Outcomes

Program Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

a H S H H H S H

b H H H H H H H H

c S H S S H S S

d H S S S H S S

e H H H H H S H














MAPPING OF BLOOMS TAXONOMY WITH COURSE OUTCOMES

2.

Understanding

/

Comprehensio

n :

Comprehending

the meaning,

translation,

interpolation,

and

interpretation of

instructions and

problems. State

a problem in

one's own

words.

Key Words:

Classify,

Compare,

Contrast,

Demonstrate,

Explain,

Extend,

Illustrate, Infer,

Interpret,

Outline, Relate,

Rephrase,

Show,

Summarize,

Translate

3. Applying

/

Application

:

Use a

concept in a

new

situation or

unprompted

use of an

abstraction.

Applies

what was

learned in

the

classroom

into novel

situations in

the work

place.

Key Words:

Apply,

Build,

Choose,

Construct,

Develop,

Experiment,

with,

Identify,

Interview,

Make use of,

Model,

Organize,

Plan, Select,

Solve,

Utilize

5.

6.

Creating /

Synthesis

:

Builds a

structure

or pattern

from

diverse

elements.

Put parts

together to

form a

whole,

with

emphasis

on

creating a

new

meaning

or

structure.

Key

Words:

Adapt,

Build,

Change,

Choose,

Combine,

Compile,

Compose,

Construct,

Create,

Delete,

Design,

Develop,

Discuss,

Elaborate,

Estimate,

Formulate

, Happen,

Imagine,

Improve,

Invent,

Make up,

Maximize

, Minimize,

Modify,

Original,

Originate,

Plan,

Predict,

Propose,

Blooms Taxonomy

4. Analyzing / Analysis :

Evaluating / Evaluation:

Make Separates judgments material or about the concepts into value of component ideas or parts so that materials. its

1. organizationa Key Words:

Course Outcomes

Rememberin l structure Agree,

g / may be Appraise,

Knowledge: understood. Assess,

Recall or Distinguishes Award,

retrieve between facts Choose,

previous and Compare,

learned inferences. Conclude, information. Criteria,

Key Words: Criticize,

Key Words: Analyze, Decide,

Choose, Assume, Deduct,

Define, Find, Categorize, Defend,

How, Label, Classify, Determine,

List, Match, Compare, Disprove,

Name, Omit, Conclusion, Estimate,

Recall, Contrast, Evaluate,

Relate, Discover, Explain,

Select, Show, Dissect, Importance,

Spell, Tell, Distinguish, Influence,

What, When, Divide, Interpret,

Where, Examine, Judge,

Which, Who, Function, Justify,

Why Inference, Mark, Inspect, List, Measure, Motive, Opinion, Relationships Perceive, , Simplify, Prioritize, Survey, Prove, Rate, Take, part, Recommend in, Test For, , Rule on, Theme Select, Support,

value



Solution,

Solve,

Suppose,

Test,

Theory

1. An ability to

determine the

COP of VCRS

√

√

√

2.An ability to

describe and select

a component to

meet desired need

of refrigeration

√

√

3.An ability to

derive,formulat

e and solve

problems on

vapour

absorption and

air refrigeration

systems

√

√

√

4.An Ability to

evaluate the

psychrometric

properties and to

perform load

calculations

√

√

√

5.An ability to

illustrate the

psychometric

processes and

demonstrate

various heat pump circuits

√

√

√



OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

UNIT – I

1. Which of the refrigerators is used in ships in olden days [ A ]

A)Bell-coleman Air refrigerators

B)Vapour compression refrigerators

C)Both (a) and (b)

D)None

2. With undercooling the C.O.P of the cycle [ B ]

A)Decreases

B)Increases

C)Remain constant

D)None

6. Air refrigeration cycle works on [ C ]

A)Reversedcarnot cycle

B)Bell-coleman cycle

C)Both (a) and (b)

D)Rankine cycle

7. Running cost of the air refrigeration plant is [ A ]

A)High

B)Low

C)Medium

D)None

8. In which of the following air refrigeration system secondary compressor is required [B ]

A)air-cooling

3.If T1=T2 the C.O.P of carnot cycle is A)Zero

B)One

C)Infinity

D)None

[ C ]

4.During a refrigeration cycle, heat is rejected by the refrigerant in a A)Compressor

B)Condenser

C)Evaporator

D)Expansion value

[ A ]

5.Onetonne as refrigeration is equal to A)21KJ/min

B)210KJ/min

C)420KJ/min

D)620KJ/min

[ B ]



B)Boot-strap

C)Both (a) and (b)

D)None

9. The compression of air in the compressor follows the law [ D ]

A)T=C

B)P=C

C)h=C

D)S=Constant

10. In actual cycle the compression and expansion [ C ]

A)Follows Isentropic law

B)Compression follows Isentropic law

C)Compression and expansion do not follows Isentropic

D)None of the above

11 The coefficient of performance (COP) of a refrigerator working as a heat pump is given by:

[ B ]

A) (COP)heatpump = (COP)refrigerator + 2 B) (COP)heatpump = (COP)refrigerator + 1

C) (COP)heatpump = (COP)refrigerator - 1

D) (COP)heatpump = (COP)refrigerator

12 In the case of a refrigeration system undergoing an irreversible cycle, is: [ A ]

A) < 0

B) = 0

C) > 0

D) Not sure

13 Efficiency of a Carnot engine is 75%. If the cycle direction is reversed, COP of the reversed

Carnot cycle is [A]

A) 1.33

B) 0.75

C) 0.33

D) 1.75

14 A heat pump working on a reversed Carnot cycle has a C.O.P. of 5. If it works as a

refrigerator taking 1 kW of work input, the refrigerating effect will be: [D]

A) 1 kW

B) 2 kW

C) 2 kW

D) 4 kW

15 The coefficient of performance of a refrigerator working on a reversed Carnot cycle is 4. The

ratio of the highest absolute temperature to the lowest absolute temperature is: [B]

A) 1.2

B) 1.25

C) 3.33



D) 4

16 In a refrigeration plant, if the condenser temperature increases, the power input to the

compressor will [A]

A) Increase

B) Decrease

C) Remain the same

D) Be unpredictable

17 A refrigerating machine working on reversed Carnot cycle takes out 2 kW of heat from the

system at 200 K while working between temperature limits of 300 K and 200 K. C.O.P. and

power consumed by the cycle will, respectively, be: [C]

A) 1 and 1 kW

B) 1 and 2 kW

C) 2 and 1 kW

D) 2 and 2 kW

18 One ton refrigeration is equivalent to: [A]

A) 3.5 kW

B) 50 kJ/s

C) 1000 J/min

D) 1000 kJ/min

19 Which one of the following statements is correct? In a domestic refrigerator periodic

defrosting is required because frosting [B]

A) Causes corrosion of materials

B) Reduces heat extraction

C) Overcools food stuff

D) partially blocks refrigerant flow

20 When the lower temperature is fixed, COP of a refrigerating machine can be improved by:

[D]

A) Operating the machine at higher speeds B) Operating the machine at lower speeds

C) Raising the higher temperature

D) Lowering the higher temperature

UNIT – II

1. The effects of superheating of vapour in the evaporator and sub cooling of condensate in the

condenser, for the same compressor work [D]

A) Increase the COP

B) Decrease the COP

C) Superheating increases COP, but sub cooling decreases COP

D) Superheating decreases COP, but sub cooling increases COP



2. Replacing a water-cooled condenser with an air-cooled one in a vapour compression

refrigeration system with constant evaporator pressure results in [D]

A)Increase in condensation pressure

B)Decrease in pressure ratio

C)Increase in pressure ratio

D)Increase in condensation temperature

3. In a vapour compression cycle, the refrigerant, immediately after expansion value is: [D]

A) Saturated liquid

B) Subcooled liquid

C) Dry vapour

D) Wet vapour

4. Excessive pressure drop in liquid line in a refrigerating system causes [B]

A) High condenser pressure

B) Flashing of the liquid refrigerant

C) Higher evaporator pressure

D) Under cooling of the liquid refrigerant

5. In system A vapour are superheated by 10°C in the evaporator while in system B vapour are

superheated by 10°C in a liquid vapour regenerative heat exchanger, other conditions being the

same. Then [A]

A) COP of A = COP of B

B) COP of both A and B > COP of Reversed Carnot Cycle

C) COP of A> COP of B

D) COP of A< COP of B

6. Consider the following statements pertaining to a vapour compression type refrigerator: [B]

1. The condenser rejects heat to the surroundings from the refrigerant.

2. The evaporator absorbs heat from the surroundings to be cooled.

3. Both the condenser and evaporator are heat exchangers with refrigerants a common medium.

4. The amount of heat exchanged in condenser and evaporator are equal under steady conditions.

Which of the above statements are correct?

A) 1 and 2

B) 1, 2 and 3

C) 1, 2 and 4

D) 2, 3 and 4

7. Assertion (A): In a vapour compression refrigeration system, the condenser pressure should be

kept as low as possible.

Reason (R): Increase in condenser pressure reduces the refrigerating effect and increases the

work of compression. [A]

A)Both A and R are individually true and R is the correct explanation of A

B)Both A and R are individually true but R is not the correct explanation of A

C)A is true but R is false

D)A is false but R is true

8.Consider the following statements: [A]



1. The work of compressor in vapour compression refrigeration system increases with superheat

of the suction vapour.

2. The work of compressor depends on the pressure difference rather than the temperature

difference of evaporator and condenser.

3. The coefficient of performance is within the range of 3 to 6 except at very low temperature

when it may be less than 1. Which of the statements given above are correct?

A) 1, 2 and 3

B)1 and 2 only

C) 1 and 3 only

D) 2 and 3 only

9. Consider the following statements: [C]

A decrease in evaporator temperature of a vapour compression machine leads to:

1. An increase in refrigerating effect

2. An increase in specific volume of vapour

3. A decrease in volumetric efficiency of compressor

4. An increase in compressor work Of these statements:

A) 1, 3 and 4 are correct

B) 1, 2 and 3 are correct

C) 2, 3 and 4 are correct

D) 2 and 4 are correct.

10. Assertion [B]

(A): In vapour compression refrigeration system throttle valve is used and not expansion

cylinder.

Reason (R): Throttling is a constant enthalpy process.

A)Both A and R are individually true and R is the correct explanation of A

B)Both A and R are individually true but R is not the correct explanation of A

C)A is true but R is false

D)A is false but R is true

11. Consider a two stage reciprocating air compressor with a perfect intercooler operating at the

best intermediate pressure. Air enters the low pressure cylinder at 1 bar, 27° C and leaves the

high pressure cylinder at 9bar. Assume the index of compression and expansion in each stage is

1.4 and that for air R = 286.7 J/Kg K, the work done for the kg air in the high pressure cylinder

is: [a]

A) 111 kJ

B) 222 kJ

C) 37 kJ

D) 74 kJ

12 A refrigeration compressor designed to operate with R 22…….(can/cannot) be operated with

R 12 because the condensing pressure of R22 at any give temperature is ………………

(higher/lower) than that of R 12. [A]

A) Cannot; Higher

B) Can; Higher

C) Cannot; Lower

D) Can; Lower



13 Which of the following statements does NOT apply to the volumetric efficiency of a

reciprocating air compressor? [A]

A) It decreases with increase in inlet temperature

B) It increases with decrease in pressure ratio

C) It increases with decrease in clearance ratio

D) It decreases with increase in clearance to stroke ratio

14.Clearance volume of a reciprocating compressor is 100 ml, and the volume of the cylinder at

bottom dead centre is 1.0 litre. The clearance ratio of the compressor is: [C]

A) 1/11

B) 1/10

C) 1/9

D) 1/12

15A centrifugal compressor is suitable for which of the following? ` [D]

A) High pressure ratio, low mass flow

B) Low pressure ratio, low mass flow

C) High pressure ratio, high mass flow

D) Low pressure ratio, high mass flow

16 Which of the following can be the cause/causes of an air-cooled compressor getting

overheated during operation? [D]

1. Insufficient lubricating oil.

2. Broken valve strip.

3. Clogged intake filter. Select the correct answer using the code given below:

A) Only 3

B) Only 1 and 2

C) Only 2 and 3

D) 1, 2 and 3

17 Which type of valves is generally used in reciprocating refrigerant compressors? [C]

A) Mushroom valve

B) Puppet valve

C) Plate valve

D) Throttle valve

18Reciprocating compressors are provided with [A]

A) Simple disc/plate valve

B) Poppet valve

C) Spring-loaded disc valve

D) Solenoid valve

19 Which one of the following statements is correct? [C]

In reciprocating compressors, one should aim at compressing the air

A) Adiabatically

B) Isentropically

C) Isothermally



D) Polytropically

20 In a single stage reciprocating air compressor, the work done on air to compress it from

suction pressure to delivery pressure will be minimum when the compression is [A]

A) Isothermal process

B) Adiabatic process

C) Polytropic process

D) Constant pressure process

UNIT – III

1 Electrolux refrigerator also known as [ B ]

A) Two fluid absorption system

B) Three fluid absorption system

C) Four fluid absorption system

D) none

2 The purpose to eliminate the pump in Electrolux refrigerator is to make the machine [C]

A)Noiseless

B)absence of moving parts

C)both'a'&'b'

D)None

3 In absorption type refrigeration system heating cooling and refrigeration takes place at the

temperature as 100°C, 20°C, -10°C. Find C.O.P of the system [ B ]

A)3.2

B)2.5

C)1.91

D)none

4. In the Electrolux refrigerator the strong aqua ammonia solution is heated in the [ B ]

A) Condenser

B) generator

C) evaporator

D) none

5 In Lithium Bromide absorption refrigeration system the refrigerant is [A]

A) Ammonia

B) Water

C) Lithium bromide solution

D) none

6. In equation Qp=7iab. I where TTab is the [ C ]

A) Peltier coefficient

B) Seebeck coefficient

C) Thomson coefficient

D) none



7. In seebeck effect the open circuit voltage developed is proportional to [ A ]

A) Temperature difference

B) current

C) both 'a' & 'b'

D) none

8. In peltier effect the heat absorbed in unit time is proportional to [ B ]

A) Temperature difference

B) current

C) both 'a' & 'b'

D) none

9. Vortex tube a device which produce [ A ]

A) cold

B) heat

C) both 'a' & 'b'

D) none

10. An efficient nozzle is designed to have [D]

A) higher velocity

B) higher mass flow

C) minimum inlet losses

D) all the above

11. In a steam jet refrigeration system , the motive steam expands in [ C ]

A) convergent nozzle

B) divergent nozzle

C) convergent - divergent nozzle

D) any nozzle

12.The velocity of steam at the exit of the nozzle is [ A ]

A) super sonic

B) sonic

C) sub sonic

D) none of these

13.The C .O. P of a steam jet refrigeration system varies from [ A ]

A) 0.5 to 0.8

B) 2 to 4

C) 5 to10

D) none of these

14.The compression device used in a steam jet refrigeration system is a [ B ]

A) vapour compressor

B) steam ejector

C) diffuser



D) liquid pump

15 Of small installations of refrigeration systems (up to 35 KW), which type of condenser is

used?[c]

A) shell and tube

B) shell and coil type

C)double tube type

D) air cooled type

16 In an Electrolux refrigerator: [B]

A) Ammonia is absorbed in water

B) Ammonia is a absorbed in hydrogen

C) Hydrogen is evaporated in ammonia

D) Ammonia evaporated in hydrogen

17Absorbent in a vapour absorption refrigeration system separates from the refrigerant only

when it[A]

A) Is sufficiently heated

B) Is sprayed on cooling water

C) Is cooled

D) Reacts with refrigerant

18In the absorption refrigeration cycle, the compressor of the vapour compression refrigeration

cycle is replaced by: [D]

A) Liquid pump

B) Generator

C) Absorber and generator

D) Absorber, liquid pump and generator

19The refrigerant used for absorption refrigerators working heat from solar collectors is a

mixture of water and [D]

A) Carbon dioxide

B) Sulphur dioxide

C) Lithium bromide

D) Freon 12

20 Waste heat can be effectively used in which one of the following refrigeration systems? [B]

A) Vapour compression cycle

B) Vapour absorption cycle

C) Air refrigeration cycle

D) Vortex refrigeration system



UNIT – IV

1. The deposition of frost on evaporator tubes of an air conditioner will results in [A]

A) decrease in heat transfer

B) increase in heat transfer

C) no change in heat transfer

D) increase in capacity of evaporator

2. The temperature of air recorded by a thermometer, when it is not effected by the moisture

present in it is called [B]

A) Wet bulb temperature

B) Dry bulb temperature

C) Dew point temperature

D) none

3. The difference between the dry bulb temperature and wet bulb temperature is called [B]

A) Dry bulb depression

B) Wet bulb depression

C) Dew point depression

D) degree of saturation

4. The vertical and uniformly spaced lines on a psychometric chart indicates [A]

A) Dry bulb depression

B) Wet bulb depression

C) Dew point depression

D) specific humidity

5. The curved lines on a psychometric chart indicates [D]

A) Dry bulb temperature

B) Wet bulb temperature

C) Dew point temperature

D) Relative humidity

6 The % of CO2 in the atmosphere is nearly

A) 0.03%

B)0.6%

C)2%

D) 6%

[ A ]

7. On psychometric chart wet bulb temperature lines are [C ]

A) Vertical

B) Horizontal

C) Inclined

D) Curved

8. If Pa and Pv denoted respectively the partial pressure of dry air and that of water vapour in

moist air the specific humidity of air is given by [ C ]

A) Pv/(Pa+Pv)



B) Pv/Pa

C) 0.622Pv/Pa

D) 0.622Pv/(Pa+Pv)

10 The sensing bulb of the thermostatic expansion valve is located at the [A]

A) Exit of evaporator

B) inlet of evaporator

C) Exit of the condenser

D) inlet of the condenser

11. A valve which maintains a constant degree of superheat at the end of the evaporator coil is

called [C]

A) Automatic expansion valve

B) high side float valve

C) Thermostatic expansion valve

D) low side float valve

12. Which one of the following is responsible for the operation of a thermostatic expansion

valve? [C]

A) Pressure changes in evaporator

B) Temperature changes in evaporator

C) Degree of superheat in evaporator

D) Degree of subcooling in evaporator

13. A thermostatic expansion valve in refrigeration system [A]

A) Ensures the evaporator completely filled with refrigerant of the load

B) is suitable only for constant load system

C) maintains different temperatures in evaporator in proportion to load

D) None of the above

14. What is hunting of thermostatic expansion valve? [C]

A) A variation of evaporator load with degree of superheat

B) A variation in pressure of the evaporator with variation of load

C) Alternate overfeeding and starving of refrigerant flow in evaporator

D) This is not used in connection with expansion valve

15. Consider the following statements: [A]

The pressure in a capillary tube of a refrigerator decreases because

1. Tube wall offers frictional resistance

2. Refrigerant accelerates in the tube

3. Tube transfer the heat

4. Potential energy decreases

Of these statements:

A) 1 and 2 are correct

B) 1,2 and 3 are correct

C) 2 and 4 are correct

D) 3 and 4 are correct



16. An expansion valve is NOT used for reducing the pressure in the [D]

A) Vapour compression refrigeration

B) vapour absorption refrigeration

C)Steam-jet refrigeration cycle

D) gas refrigeration cycle

17. Which of the following types of expansion valves is suitable for a refrigeration plant

operating at constant load? [B]

A) Thermostatic expansion valve

B) automatic expansion valve

C) Capillary tube

D) none of the above

18. An automatic valve is required to maintain constant [A]

A) Pressure in the evaporator

B) temperature in the freezer

C) Pressure in the liquid line

D) temperature in the condenser

19. Which one of the following is the most important function of thermostatic expansion valve?

[A]

A) To control the degree of superheat B) To control the evaporator temperature

C) To control the pressure drop

D) To control the evaporator pressure

20 What are the requirements of comfort air conditioning? [ D ]

A)Supply of oxygen

B) Heat removal

C) Moist removal

D) All the above

UNIT – V

1 Consider the following statements: [C]

Dry compression in reciprocating compressor is preferred because it

1. Prevent valve damage

2. Enables use of thermostatic expansion valve.

3. Minimizes irreversibility in the compressor.

4. Prevents washing out of the lubricating oil from cylinder walls.



B) 2 and 3 are correct



2. Consider the following statements: [A]



The pressure in a capillary tube of a refrigerator decreases because

1. Tube wall offers frictional resistance

2. Refrigerant accelerates in the tube

3. Tube transfer the heat

4. Potential energy decreases



B) 1, 2 and 3 are correct



3. In on-off control refrigeration system, which one of the following expansion devices is used?

[A]

A) Capillary tube B) Thermostat

C) Automatic expansion valve

D) Float valve

4. The comfort condition in air conditioning system are defined by [ A ]

A) 22c DBT and 60% RH

B) 15c DBT and 80%RH

C) 25c DBT and 100% RH

D) 20c DBT and 75%RH

5. Usually central air conditioning system as compared to individual system has [ A ]

A)Higher overall efficiency

B) Lower overall efficiency

C)Same overall efficiency

D) none

6. For summer air conditioning, the relative humidity should not be less than [ A ]

A)40%

B)60%

C)75%

D)90%

7. The sensible heat factor for auditorium (or) cinema hall is generally kept as [B ]

A) 0.6

B)0.7

C)0.8

D) 0.9

8. For winter air conditioning the relative humidity should not be more than [ A ]

A)40%

B)60%

C)75%

D)90%

9. The conditioned air supplied to the room must have the capacity to take up [ C ]

A) Room sensible heat load only.



B)Room latent heat load only

C) Both room sensible heat and latent heat loads

D) None.

10. In summer air conditioning to reduce the sensible heat and water vapor Content of the air by

[B]

A) Cooling and humidification. B) Cooling and dehumidification.

C) Heating and humidification.

D) Heating and dehumidification.

11. In winter air conditioning to increase the sensible heat and water vapour Content of the air by

[C] A)Cooling and humidification

B)Cooling and dehumidification

C)Heating and humidification

D)None

12. What are the factors affecting the comfort air conditioning [ D ]

A)Temperature of air

B) Humidity of air

C)Purity of air

D) All the above

13. What are the requirements of comfort air conditioning? [ D ]

A)Supply of oxygen

B) Heat removal

C) Moist removal

D) All the above

14 Solar energy can be directly used in [B]

A) Vapour compression refrigeration system

B) Vapour absorption refrigeration system

C) Air refrigeration system

D) Jet refrigeration system

15 Which of the following is not an essential component of any refrigeration system, where

refrigeration effect is produced by vaporization of refrigerant? [A]

A) Compressor

B) condenser

C) Evaporator

D) Expansion device

16Where an air refrigeration cycle is generally employed? [D]

A) Domestic refrigerators

B) Commercial refrigerators

C) Air-conditioning

D) Gas liquefaction

17. Adiabatic saturation is the process of [ C ]

A)Increasing humidity ratio with out change in heat content.



20. If by pass factor is B during sensible cooling process, then coil efficiency is given as A)B-l

B)l-B

C)l/B

D)l/l-B

[B]

11.13 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

B)Heating air with out changing humidity ratio.

C))Adding moisture at same wet bulb temperature

D)None.

18. Air is dehumidified by [ D ]

A) Heating.

B)Cooling

C) Chemical absorption

D both b&c

19. Latent heat is needed to [ A ]

A)Vaporize water in to steam and vice versa

B)Convert ice in to steam

C)Convert water to super cooled ice

D)None

Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - I

Tutorials Short Answer Questions

1 What is the refrigeration?

difference between air conditioning and Knowledge a

2 Define unit of Refrigeration. Remember b

3 Define refrigerating effect Knowledge e

4 Define COP of a refrigerator Remember c

5 Define Ton of refrigeration Knowledge a

6 State the applications of refrigerator Application a

7 What are the effect of super heat and sub-cooling on .the vapour compression cycle

Knowledge a

8 What is an open air refrigeration cycle Knowledge a

9 What are the advantages of VCRS Knowledge b

10 Sketch a simple VCRS Analysis b



Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - I

Tutorials


1 Draw neat sketch of simple vapor compression refrigeration system and explain.

Analyze a

2 Explain Carnot refrigeration cycle Understand a

3

Define the following terms of refrigeration i. Refrigerating effect

ii. Ton of refrigeration

iii. COP iv. Refrigerator and heat pump.

Knowledge

a

4

A refrigerator works on the Carnot cycle between the

temperatures -70C and 27

0C. It makes 500 kg of ice per hour

at -50 C from water at 14

0C. Find power required to drive the

compressor and COP of the cycle. Take specific heat of ice as

2.4 kJ / kg 0C and latent heat 334.4 kJ/kg.

Evaluation

b

5

A refrigerator using CO2 as refrigerant works between the

temperatures 17.50C and -17.5

0C. The CO2 leaves the

compressor at 300C. The gas is completely condensed but

there is no under cooling. Find theoretical COP.

Evaluation

a

6

Draw the refrigeration cycle on T-s diagram when the

refrigerant is dry and saturated at the end of compression and

an expression for the COP in terms of i. temperature and

entropies ii. enthalpies.

Analyze

b

7

A CO2 refrigerating plant works between the pressure limit of

56 and 21 bar. The vapour leaves the compressor at 34 0C

and there is no under-cooling in the condenser. Find

theoretical COP of the system. Assume total heat per kg of

vapour after leaving the compressor is 230 kJ/kg.

Evaluation

e

8 What are the important types of vapour compression cycles? Explain any two with the help of P-h diagram.

c

9

An ammonia refrigerator produces 30 Tonnes of ice from and

at 00C in 24 hours. The temperature range of the compressor

is 250C to -150C. The vapour is dry saturated at the end of

compression and an expression and an expansion value is

used. Assume a coefficient of performance to be 60% of athe

theoretical value. Calculate the power required to drive the

compressor. Latent heat of ice = 335 kJ/kg. Properties of

ammonia are;

Evaluation

a



10

A R12 refrigerating machine works on a vapor compression

cycle. The temperature of refrigerant in the evaporator is -

200C. The vapor is dry saturated when it enters the

compressor and leaves it in a superheated condition. The

condenser temperature is 300C. Assuming Cp for R12 in the

superheated condition as 1.884 KJ/Kg K, determine: i)

Condition of vapor at the entrance to the condenser, ii)

Condition of vapor at the entrance to the evaporator and iii)

COP of the machine. Properties of R12

Evaluation

a

Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - II


1 Define a refrigerant compressor Remember a

2 List the classification if compressors according to the number of working strokes

Knowledge a

3 Define compressor capacity Remember a

4 Sketch a single acting reciprocating compressor and name the parts

Create b

5 What are the factors affecting volumetric efficiency of a reciprocating compressor

Analyze a

6 The door of a running refrigerator inside a room was left open. What will happen?

Evaluate b

7 State the classification of condensers Remember e

8 What are the factors affecting the condenser capacity Apply c

9 Define fouling factor Remember a

10 Sketch a shell and tube evaporator Create a

Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - II

Tutorials Long Answer Questions

1 Explain the working of a single stage reciprocating refrigerator Understand b



compressor

2 Explain two stage reciprocating compressor with intercooler Apply e

3 Explain any two methods of Defrosting Understand b

4 Explain Evaporative type condensers Knowledge a

5 Explain the working of a rotary screw compressor. Understand b

6 Derive an expression for the shaft work of a reciprocating compressor as- summing zero clearance volume.

b

7 Explain Tube-in-tube water cooled and shell and coil condensers

Understand b

8 Explain shell and coil evaporators with a neat sketch Knowledge e

9 Explain with a neat sketch an Automatic expansion valve Understand b

10 Explain thermostatic expansion valve with a neat sketch Knowledge a

Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - III


1 Name the cycles on which an Air refrigeration system works. Remember b

2 Show carnot’s cycle on P-V & T-S diagrams Create e

3 What is the purpose of using Analyser in VARS Analyze b

4 Why hydrogen is used in electrolux refrigeration system Analyze a

5 What is aqua-ammonia Understand b

6 State the properties of refrigerant-absorbent mixture Evaluate e

7 What are the advantages of VARS Understand b

8 State the principle of three fluid VARS Remember e

9 Why COP of a refrigeration system is always more than one. Analyze b

10 State the principle of steam jet refrigeration system Remember a

.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - III


1 Explain with sketch the working principle of aqua Ammonia refrigeration system.

Understand b

2 Explain with sketch the working principle of water-Lithium bromide refrigeration system.

Understand e

3 Explain with neat sketch Domestic Electorlux Refrigerator Understand b

4 Discuss the advantages of vapor absorption refrigeration system over vapor compression refrigeration system.

Understand b

5 Derive an expression for COP of a Bell-Coleman cycle refrigeration system

Apply e

6 A Bell - Coleman cycle works between 1 and 6 bar pressure limits. The compression and expansion indices are 1.25 and 1.3

Apply b



respectively. Obtain COP and tonnage of the unit for an

airflow rate of 0.5 kg/s. Neglect clearance volume and take

temperature at the beginning of compression and expansion to

be 70C and 37

0C, respectively.

7 Refrigerator working on Bell-Coleman cycle operates between

pressure limits of 1.05 bar and 8.5 bar. Air is drawn from the

cold chamber at 100C, compressed and then is cooled to 30

0C,

before entering the expansion cylinder. The expansion and

compression follow the law, PV1.3

= constant. Determine the

theoretical cop of the system.

Create

a

8 Refrigerator working on Bell-Coleman cycle operates between

pressure limits of 1.05 bar and 8.5 bar. Air is drawn from the

cold chamber at 100C, compressed and then is cooled to 30

0C,

before entering the expansion cylinder. The expansion and

compression follow the law, PV1.3= constant. Determine the

theoretical cop of the system.

Create

b

9 Explain the principle and working of a Steam jet refrigeration system

Remember b

10 a) What is the principle of steam jet refrigeration system? b) What are the limitations of steam jet refrigeration system?

Understand e

Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - IV


1 How are air-conditioning systems classified Apply b

2 How does humidity affect human comfort Understand e

3 What are the various sources of heat gain of an air-conditioned space

Remember b

4 What do you mean by the term infiltration in heat load calculations

Understand a

5 Give the 4 important parameters that are to be measured and controlled of an air conditioning system

Remember b

6 Name some of the equipments used in air conditioning system Remember b

7 What are the factors to be considered in air conditioning a room

Analyze e

8 Define relative humidity Remember b

9 What is degree of saturation Understand b

10 How heating and humidification is attained using steam injection

Apply e



Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - IV


1 Explain summer air conditioning system Understand b

2 Explain winter air conditioning system Understand e

3 Explain sensible heating and sensible cooling process Understand b

4 Ten grams of moisture per kg of dry air is removed from

atmospheric air when it is passed through an air conditioning

system and its temperature becomes 200C. The atmospheric

conditions are 400C DBT and 60% RH. Calculate the

following for the conditioned air. i. Relative humidity, ii. Wet-

bulb temperature, iii. Dew point temperature, iv. Enthalpy

change for the air.

Assume standard atmospheric pressure.

Apply

a

5 The atmospheric air at 180C DBT and 70% RH is supplied to

the heating chamber at the rate of 120m3/min. The leaving air

has a temperature of 240C without change in its moisture

contents. Determine the heat added to the air per minute and

final RH of the air.

Apply

b

6 800 m3/min of re-circulated air at 220C DBT and 100C dew

point temperature is to be mixed with 300 m3/min of fresh air

at 300C DBT and 50% RH. Determine the enthalpy, specific

volume, humidity ratio and dew point temperature of the

mixture.

Create

b

7 1100 m3 of air per minute at 250 C DBT and 45% R.H. is

supplied to an auditorium. The condition of the atmospheric air

is 350 C DBT and 65% R.H. The required condition is

achieved first by cooling and dehumidifying and then by

heating. Find the cooling capacity required in tons of

refrigeration and heating capacity required in kW. Take air

pressure as 1.03 bar.

Apply

a

8 An auditorium of 100 seating capacity of conditioned for the

given specifications Out door conditions - 35 and 65% RH

Required air inlet conditions - 15o C and 40 RH.

The required condition is achieved first by cooling and

dehumidifying and then by heating. Find the following

(a) The capacity of the cooling coil in tons of refrigeration

(b) Capacity of the heating coil in kW

(c) By-pass factor of the heating coil if the surface temp of the

coil is 22o C

Create

b

9 The following data refer to an air-conditioning system of a cinema hall for winter conditions: Outdoor conditions = 80C

DBT, 57% RH, required comfort conditions = 200C DBT,

Create

b



57% RH, seating capacity = 1800, amount of outdoor air

supplied = 0.22 m3/min/person. The required condition is

achieved by heating, humidifying and then again by heating.

The air coming out of the humidifier is having 72% relative

humidity. Find:

(a) The heating capacity of the first heater in kW and the

surface temperature of the coil if its by-pass factor is 0.27.

(b) The capacity of the humidifier in kg/h.

(c) The heating capacity of the second heater and its by-pass

factor, if the surface temperature of the coil is 230C.

10 An air conditioned hall of 1100 m3 volume is maintained at

220C DBT and 52% RH. When outdoor air conditions are

450C DBT and 260C WBT, the hall sensible heat load is 23kw.

The fresh air is 22% of the total air supplied. The ADP of the

cooling coil is 100C and its bypass factor is 0.12. Calculate

a) The condition and flow rate of supply air

b) The latent heat gain of the room c) The cooling capacity of the coil.

Evaluate

a

Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - V


1 What are the equipment used in air-conditioning system Remember b

2 Discuss the classification of air conditioning systems Understand e

3 What are the applications of air conditioning system Apply b

4 Sketch a typical winter air conditioning system Create a

5 What is humidification Remember b

6 Define dehumidification Remember e

7 Sketch a simple summer air conditioning system Create e

8 How to calculate GSHF Evaluate b

9 What is meant by effective room sensible heat factor Analyze b

10 What are the components of cooling load Remember e

Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - V


1 Define the “human comfort”, and explain the factors which affect the human comfort.

Remember b

2 a) List out different sources that contribute to the sensible heat

load of the room to be air conditioned.

b) Give the classification of the effects of heat on human body?

Remember

Apply

e



11.14 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

Explain briefly.

3 Explain heating and humidification process Understand b

4 Explain cooling and dehumidification process Understand a

5 Describe the working of the heat pump by drawing the circuit for Water to air design

Understand b

6 Describe the working of the heat pump by drawing the circuit for Air to water design

Understand b

7 Describe any two methods of humidification of air by atomizing the water into air, with simple line sketches.

Apply e

8 With the help of a diagram, explain the Air washer humidifier and state the advantages of this type.

Understand b

9 Describe the use of heat pump for heating and cooling cycle with a neat sketch.

Apply a

10 Explain various types of fans and blowers Remember b

Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - I

Assignment Short Answer Questions

1 Define COP of a refrigerator Remember b

2 Define refrigerating effect Remember e

3 State the applications of refrigerator Apply b

4 Define refrigeration Remember a

5 What is an open air refrigeration cycle Understand b

6 What are the advantages of VCRS Understand c

7 Sketch a simple VCRS Create e

8 What is the effect of suction pressure on VCRS Evaluate b

9 State the relation between COP of Heat pump and Refrigerator. Apply a

10 What is the effect of discharge pressure on VCRS Evaluate b

Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - I

Assignment Long Answer Questions

1 Explain five means of producing cooling effect Understand e

2 Draw neat sketch of simple vapor compression refrigeration system and explain.

a

3 Explain how refrigerant produces cooling effect Understand a

4 Explain how ice can be used for refrigeration. Is it possible to Understand e



produce the temperature below zero degree with the help of ice

5 Explain Carnot refrigeration cycle Understand e

6 Draw the refrigeration cycle on T-s diagram when the

refrigerant is dry and saturated at the end of compression and

expression for the COP in terms of i. temperature and

entropies ii. Enthalpies.

Create

a

7 A CO2 refrigerating plant works between the pressure limit of

56 and 21 bar. The vapour leaves the compressor at 34 0C and

there is no under-cooling in the condenser. Find theoretical

COP of the system. Assume total heat per kg of vapour after

leaving the compressor is 230 kJ/kg.

Evaluate

a

8 An ammonia refrigerator works between - 6.7 0C and 26 0C.

The vapour leaves the compressor in dry and saturated

condition. Assuming there is no under-cooling, and the

theoretical COP of the system.

Evaluate

b

9 A machine working on a Carnot cycle operates between 305 K

and 260 K. Determine the COP when it is operated as i) a

refrigerator ii) a heat pump and a iii) a heat engine

Evaluate

b

10 The capacity of a refrigerator is 200 TR when working

between -60C and 250 C. determine the mass of ice produced

per day from water at 250C. Also find the power required to

drive the unit. Assume that the cycle operates on reversed

Carnot cycle and latent heat of ice is 335 KJ/Kg.J

Evaluate

b

Sl.N

o

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outco

me

UNIT - II


1 Define compressor capacity Remember a

2 Sketch a single acting reciprocating compressor and name the parts

Create a

3 List the classification if compressors according to the number of working strokes

Knowledge b

4 The door of a running refrigerator inside a room was left open. What will happen?

Evaluate b

5 What are the factors affecting volumetric efficiency of a reciprocating compressor

Analyze e

6 Define a refrigerant compressor Remember a

7 State the classification of condensers Remember a

8 What are the factors affecting the condenser capacity Apply b

9 Define fouling factor Remember b

10 Sketch a shell and tube evaporator Create b

Sl.No Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Course

Outcome



Level

UNIT - II


1 Explain the classification of compressors Understand e

2 Explain the working of a single stage reciprocating refrigerator compressor

Understand a

3 State the advantages and disadvantages of centrifugal compressor over reciprocating compressor

Remember a

4 Explain the working of a rotary screw compressor. Understand e

5 Explain the working of various air cooled condensers Understand e

6 Compare air-cooled and water cooled condensers Evaluate a

7 Describe shell and coil evaporators with a neat sketch Remember a

8 Explain any two methods of Defrosting Understand b

9 Describe thermostatic expansion valve with a neat sketch Remember b

10 Explain low side and high side float valve with neat sketches Understand b

Sl.N

o

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outco me

UNIT - III


1 Name the cycles on which an Air refrigeration system works. Remember a

2 Show carnot’s cycle on P-V & T-S diagrams Create a

3 What is the purpose of using Analyser in VARS Analyze b

4 Why hydrogen is used in electrolux refrigeration system Analyze b

5 What is aqua-ammonia Understand e

6 State the properties of refrigerant-absorbent mixture Evaluate a

7 What are the advantages of VARS Understand a

8 State the principle of three fluid VARS Remember b

9 Why COP of a refrigeration system is always more than one. Analyze b

10 State the principle of steam jet refrigeration system Remember b

Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - III


1 What is the basic function of a compressor in vapour

compression refrigerationsystems? How this function is

achieved in vapour absorption refrigerationsystem

Remember

e

2 Explain with neat sketch Domestic Electorlux Refrigerator Understand a

3 describe the working of a practical Ammonia-water vapour absorption refrigeration system

Remember a

4 What modifications are necessary in a simple absorption Evaluate e



refrigeration system in order to improve the COP of the

system.

5 What is the function of the rectifier and the analyzer in Ammonia-water vapour absorption refrigeration?

Apply e

6 Discuss the advantages of vapor absorption refrigeration system over vapor compression refrigeration system.

Understand a

7 Explain the working of a simple vapor absorption refrigeration system with a neat sketch

Understand a

8 Derive an expression for COP of a Bell-Coleman cycle refrigeration system

Create b

9 Explain the principle and working of a Steam jet refrigeration system

Understand b

10 With a neat sketch explain the working of a steam ejector. Understand b

Sl.N

o

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outco me

UNIT - IV


1 How are air-conditioning systems classified Apply a

2 How does humidity affect human comfort Understand b

3 What are the various sources of heat gain of an air- conditioned space

Remember a

4 What do you mean by the term infiltration in heat load calculations

Understand e

5 Give the 4 important parameters that are to be measured and controlled of an air conditioning system

Remember b

6 Name some of the equipments used in air conditioning system

Remember a

7 What are the factors to be considered in air conditioning a room

Analyze b

8 Define relative humidity Remember a

9 What is degree of saturation Understand b

10 How heating and humidification is attained using steam injection

Apply b

Sl.No

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT - IV


1 Describe winter air conditioning system Remember e

2 Explain year round air conditioning system Understand a

3 Describe unitary A/c system. Remember a



4 Explain evaporative cooling process Understand e

5 (a) Define i. Partial pressure of water vapour

ii. DPT

iii. RH and iv. Degree of saturation.

Remember

e

6 The following data refer to an air conditioning system for

industrial process for hot and wet summer conditions: outdoor

conditions = 330C DBT and 78% RH, required conditions =

200C DBT and 73% RH, amount of out-door air supplied =

220 m3/min, coil dew point temperature = 120C. If the

required condition is achieved by first cooling and

dehumidifying and then by heating, determine;

(a) The capacity of the cooling coil and its by-pass factor. (b) The capacity of the heating coil and surface temperature of

the heating coil if the by-pass factor is 0.18.

Evaluate

a

7 Briefly explain the cooling load calculation in air conditioning system.

Understand a

8 An air conditioned auditorium is to be maintained at 270C

DBT and 60% RH. The ambient condition is 400C DBT and

300C WBT. The total sensible heat load is 100000 KJ/h and

total latent heat load is 40000 KJ/h. 60% of the return air is re-

circulated and mixed with 40% of make-up air after the

cooling coil. The condition of air leaving the cooling coil is at

180C.

Determine: i. Room Sensible Heat Factor, ii. The condition of

air entering the auditorium; iii. The amount of make-up air;

Show the process on psychrometric chart.

Create

b

9 A room 7m x 4m x 4m is occupied by an air-water vapor

mixture at 380C. The atmospheric pressure is 1 bar and the

relative humidity is 70%. Determine the humidity ratio, dew

point, mass of dry air and mass of water vapor. If the mixture

of air-water vapor is further cooled at constant pressure until

the temperature is 100C; determine the amount of water vapor

condensed.

Evaluate

b

10 The following data refer to an air-conditioning system of a

cinema hall for winter conditions: Outdoor conditions = 80C

DBT, 57% RH, required comfort conditions = 200C DBT,

57% RH, seating capacity = 1800, amount of outdoor air

supplied = 0.22 m3/min/person. The required condition is

achieved by heating, humidifying and then again by heating.

The air coming out of the humidifier is having 72% relative

humidity. Find:

(a) The heating capacity of the first heater in kW and the

surface temperature of the coil if its by-pass factor is 0.27.

(b) The capacity of the humidifier in kg/h.

(c) The heating capacity of the second heater and its by-pass

factor, if the surface temperature of the coil is 230C.

Create

b



Sl.N

o

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outco

me

UNIT - V


1 What are the equipments used in air-conditioning system Remember a

2 Discuss the classification of air conditioning systems Understand b

3 What are the applications of air conditioning system Apply a

4 Sketch a typical winter air conditioning system Create e

5 What is humidification Remember b

6 Define dehumidification Remember a

7 Sketch a simple summer air conditioning system Create b

8 How to calculate GSHF Evaluate a

9 What is meant by effective room sensible heat factor Analyze b

10 What are the components of cooling load Remember b

Sl.N

o

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Cours

e

Outco me

UNIT - V


1 Define the “human comfort”, and explain the factors which affect the human comfort.

Remember a

2 Briefly give the details of different heat loads to be

considered for the evaluation of cooling load of a given

room.

Understand b

3 Explain how does the body attempt to compensate for a warm environment approaching body temperature

Understand a

4 Draw and explain the comfort chart and zone of comfort for year-round air conditioning.

Create e

5 Describe cooling and dehumidification process Remember b

6 Discuss about the performance of Heat pump when used

with the different sources of heat. State the advantages and

disadvantages in each case.

Understand a

7 Describe the working of the heat pump by drawing the circuit for Water to air design

Remember b

8 Explain heating and humidification process Understand a

9 Illustrate with the help of a diagram, explain the Air washer humidifier and state the advantages of this type

Analyze b

10 Describe the working of the heat pump by drawing the circuit for Air to water design

Remember b





12. HEAT TRANSFER (A60331)

COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Code A60331

Course Title Heat transfer


4 - 4

Course Coordinator Mr. E. Siva Kumar, Professor

Team of Instructors Mr. E. Siva Kumar, Professor. N. Prabhukishore Assoc. Professor, K. Sandeep kumar Asst.Professor,

COURSE OVERVIEW:

Heat transfer is the flow of thermal energy driven by thermal non-equilibrium, commonly measured as a heat flux, that is the heat flow per unit time at a control surface. This course focuses on the problems and complexities of heat transfer and emphasizes on analysis using correlations. The course assumes basic understanding of thermodynamic and fluid mechanics and exposure to differential equations and methods of solutions. Topics include modes of heat transfer and their laws, boundary conditions, conduction heat transfer –three dimensional, one dimensional steady and unsteady without heat generation, variable thermal conductivity ,fin analysis, lumped heat capacity systems, free and forced convection with dimensional analysis, laminar boundary layer theory, heat exchangers, heat transfer with phase change and radiation heat transfer.

PREREQUISITES:


UG

4

5 Thermodynamics, fluid

mechanics, engineering

mechanics

MARKS DISTRIBUTIONS:


Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests): There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm

examination consists of one objective paper, one subjective

paper and four assignments. The objective

paper is for 10 marks and subjective paper is for 10 marks,

with duration of 1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for objective

and 60 minutes for subjective paper).

Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice

questions, fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper

contains of 4 full questions (one from each unit) of

which, the student has to answer 2 questions, each question

carrying 5 marks. First midterm examination shall be

75

100




conducted for 2.5 units of syllabus and second midterm examination shall be conducted for another 2.5 units.

5 marks are allocated for Assignments. First two assignments

should be submitted before the

conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments

should be submitted before the conduct of the second mid. The

total marks secured by the student in each midterm

examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the average of the

two midterm examinations shall be taken as the final marks

secured by each candidate.


S.No Expected Learning Outcomes Assessment Method (s)

a Able to analyze steady flow heat transfer. Assignments

Midterm and University exams

b Analyze various transient conduction heat transfer ,apply and design fins for heat

transfer

Assignments Midterm and University exams

c Able to calculate the properties of free, forced convection, conduction, radiation


d Able to Draw the boiling curve, differentiate between different types of condensation


e Apply and design radiation shielding for domestic purpose


f Ability to design various heat exchangers with multiple passes




2 I Assignment 5


4 II Assignment 5



Total 75



CO’s ACCORDING TO BLOOMS LEVEL (5 units according to syllabus)

S.No Course Objectives Course Outcomes Blooms Level

1

To define the various modes of

heat transfer with basics laws

and application of conduction

heat transfer correlations in

engineering field.

An ability to define basic

modes of heat transfer,

describe different heat

exchangers, condensation

Draw boiling curve,

BL1

2

To distinguish the modes

of heat transfer conduction,

convection, radiation, heat

exchangers,

differen

t condensations.

An ability to explain in

detail about conduction,

convection, radiation

process,hea exchangers,

different condensations.

Give

examples for all modes

of heat transfer.

BL2

3

To calculate the rate of heat

transfer ,properties of modes

of heat transfer, LMTD,NTU

values

An ability to calculate the

rate of heat transfer

,properties of modes of

BL3

heat transfer, LMTD,NTU values

4

To analyze the concepts of

LMTD,NTU,different regimes

in boiling curve,different

types of condensation,free

convection and forced

convection

An ability to analyze the

concepts of

LMTD,NTU,different

regimes in boiling

curve,different types of

condensation,free convection and forced

BL4

convection

5

To Justify the when we use

forced or free convection in

different condition

To Justify the when we use

LMTD and NTU in heat

exchangers

An ability to Justify the

when we use forced or

free convection in

different

conditions.

BL5

To Justify the when we

use LMTD and NTU in

heat exchangers

BLOOMS LEVEL (BL)

BL 1: Remember / Knowledge BL 2: Understanding BL 3: Apply





Program Outcomes Level Proficiency

assessed by

A

An ability to apply knowledge of computing, mathematical

foundations, algorithmic principles, and computer science and

engineering theory in the modeling and design of computer-

based systems to real-world problems (fundamental engineering

analysis skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

B

An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to

analyze and interpret data (information retrieval skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

C

An ability to design , implement, and evaluate a computer-based

system, process, component, or program to meet desired needs,

within realistic constraints such as economic, environmental,

social, political, health and safety, manufacturability, and

sustainability (Creative Skills)

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

D

An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary teams

(team work)

N --

E

An ability to analyze a problem, identify, formulate and use the

appropriate computing and engineering requirements for

obtaining its solution (engineering problem solving skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

F

An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security and

social

issues and responsibilities (professional integrity)

N --

G

An ability to communicate effectively both in writing and orally

(speaking / writing skills)

N --

H

The broad education necessary to analyze the local and global

impact of computing and engineering solutions on individuals,

organizations, and society (engineering impact assessment skills)

N --

I

Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in

continuing

professional development and life-long learning (continuing

education awareness)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations



J A Knowledge of contemporary issues (social awareness) N --

K

An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools necessary

for

computing and engineering practice (practical engineering

analysis

skills)

N --

L

An ability to apply design and development principles in the

construction of software and hardware systems of varying

complexity (software hardware interface)

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

M

An ability to recognize the importance of professional development by

pursuing postgraduate studies or face competitive examinations that

offer challenging and rewarding careers in computing (successful career


N --




13.7 MLRIT-R15 SYLLABUS:

UNIT – I

INTRODUCTION:

Modes and mechanisms of heat transfer, Basic laws of heat transfer, Applications of heat transfer. General three

dimensional heat conduction equations in Cartesian, Cylindrical and Spherical coordinates. Different forms of

general equation, Steady state and Transient heat transfer, Initial and boundary conditions.

UNIT-II

CONDUCTION HEAT TRANSFER:

One dimensional steady state heat conduction through Homogeneous slabs, hollow cylinders and spheres, Overall

heat transfer coefficient, Electrical analogy, Critical radius of insulation. Systems with variable thermal

conductivity and Systems with internal heat generation. Extended surfaces (Fins), Long, Short and insulated tips.

ONE DIMENSIONAL TRANSIENT HEAT CONDUCTION:

Systems with negligible internal resistance, Significance of Biot and Fourier Numbers, Chart solutions of transient

conduction systems

UNIT –III

CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER:

Concepts of Continuity, Momentum and Energy Equations. Dimensional analysis-Buckingham‘s Pi Theorem -

Application for developing non-dimensional correlation for convective heat transfer.

FORCED CONVECTION: External Flows, Concepts of hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layer and use of

empirical correlations for Flat plates and Cylinders. Internal Flows, Concepts about Hydrodynamic and Thermal

Entry Lengths, use of empirical correlations for Horizontal Pipe Flow and annulus flow.

FREE CONVECTION:

Development of Hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layer along a vertical plate, Use of empirical relations for

Vertical plates and pipes.

UNIT-IV

BOILING AND CONDENSATION: Regimes of Pool boiling and Flow boiling, Critical heat flux, Calculations on

Nucleate Boiling. Film wise and drop wise condensation, Nusselt’s theory of condensation on a vertical plate -

Film condensation on vertical and horizontal cylinders using empirical correlations.

HEAT EXCHANGERS: Classification of heat exchangers, overall heat transfer Coefficient and fouling factor,

Concepts of LMTD and NTU methods, Problems using LMTD and NTU methods.

UNIT –V

RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER: Emission characteristics , Laws of black-body radiation, Irradiation, Total and

monochromatic quantities , Laws of Planck, Wien, Kirchhoff, Lambert, Stefan and Boltzmann , Heat exchange

between two black bodies , concepts of shape factor , Emissivity ,heat exchange between grey bodies , radiation

shields ,electrical analogy for radiation networks.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Heat and Mass Transfer – D.S .Kumar /S.K. Kataria & sons 2. Fundamentals of Engineering, Heat and Man Transfer, 3

rdedition, New Age, New Delhi, India- R. C.

Sachdeva (2012) 3. Heat and mass transfer –P.K. Nag/ Mc Graw Hill/ third edition.

REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Yunus A. Cengel (2012), Heat Transfer a Practical Approach, 4

th edition, Tata McGraw hill education (P)

Ltd, New Delhi, India. 2. Holman (2012), Heat Transfer (SI Units), 10thedition, Tata McGraw hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India. 3. P. S. Ghoshdastidar (2012), Heat Transfer, 2

nd edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, India.

4. Incropera, Dewitt (2012), Fundamentals of Heat Transfer, 6th edition, John Wiley,



13.8 COURSE PLAN: At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning Outcomes.

Lecture

No.

Course Learning

outcomes

Topics and / Sub-Topics Covered

Date Planned

Reference

Text

Books

L1 Discuss the introduction

heat transfer

Introduction to heat transfer

http://nptel.ac.in/courses/103103032/1 T1,R1&R4

L2 Discuss the modes of

heat transfer

Basic modes of heat transfer, fundamental laws

of heat transfer


T1,R1&R4

L3 Discuss applications of

heat transfer

Simple and general discussion about

applications of heat transfer


T1,R1&R4

L4 Discuss Fourier’s law of

heat conduction

Fourier’s law of heat conduction


L5

Derive General Heat

conduction equations in

Cartesian coordinates

General Heat conduction equations in Cartesian

coordinates


T1,R1&R4

L6

Derive General Heat


Cylindrical Coordinates

General Heat conduction equations in

Cylindrical Coordinates


T1,R1&R4

L7

Derive General Heat


Spherical Coordinates

General Heat conduction equations in Spherical

Coordinates


T1,R1&R4

L8

Derive Simplification

and forms of field

equation- Steady , Un-

steady and periodic heat

transfer

Simplification and forms of field equation-

Steady , Un-steady and periodic heat transfer


T1,R1&R4

L9

Differentiate between

different problems of

conduction

Problems on conduction


L10 Explain initial and

boundary conditions

Initial and Boundary conditions


L11

Explain heat conduction

through plane and

composite walls

heat conduction through plane and composite

walls


T1,R1&R4

L12

Understand Heat

Conduction Through

Hollow cylinders and

spheres

Heat Conduction Through Hollow cylinders

and spheres


T1,R1&R4

L13

Explain Composite

systems- Overall heat

transfer coefficient-

electrical analogy

Composite systems- Overall heat transfer

coefficient-electrical analogy


T1,R1&R4

L14 Derive Critical radius of

insulation

Critical radius of insulation


http://nptel.ac.in/courses/103103032/



L15 Derive Variable thermal

conductivity

Variable thermal conductivity


L16

Derive Systems with

heat sources or Heat

Generation

Systems with heat sources or Heat Generation


L17 Understand Extended

Surfaces and fins

Extended Surfaces and fins


L18 Evaluate the heat

transfer rate

Problems on plane and composite walls



transfer rate

Problems on hallow and composite cylinders,

hallow and composite spheres


T1,R1&R4

L20

Evaluate the heat

transfer rate

Problems on Overall heat transfer coefficient,

Critical Thickness of Insulation


T1,R1&R4


transfer rate

Problems on Heat Conduction with Internal

Heat Generation and fins


T1,R1&R4

L22

Understand Systems

with Negligible internal

resistance-Lumped

parameter analysis

Systems with Negligible internal resistance-

Lumped parameter analysis


T1,R1&R4

L23

Understand Chart

solutions of transient

conduction

Chart solutions of transient conduction



transfer rate

Problems on Significance of Biot and Fourier

Numbers, Negligible internal resistance


T1,R1&R4


transfer rate

Problems on HEISLER Chart solutions of

transient conduction systems and Gaussian

error function


T1,R1&R4

L26

Discuss Classification of

systems based on

causation of flow

Classification of systems based on causation of

flow


T1,R1&R4

L27

Discuss Condition of

flow, configuration of

flow and medium of

flow

Condition of flow, configuration of flow and

medium of flow


T1,R1&R4

L28

Analyze Dimensional

analysis as a tool for

experimental

investigation

Dimensional analysis as a tool for experimental

investigation


T1,R1&R4

L29 Illustrate Buckingham

Pi Theorem and Method

Buckingham Pi Theorem and Method


L30

Discuss Application for

developing semi

empirical non

Application for developing semi empirical non

dimensional correlation for

convection heat transfer

T1,R1&R4



dimensional correlation

for

convection heat transfer


L31

Discuss Application for

developing semi

empirical non

dimensional correlation

for convection heat

transfer,

Application for developing semi empirical non

dimensional correlation for convection heat

transfer,


T1,R1&R4

L32

Discuss Significance of

non-dimensional

numbers, Use of

empirical correlations

for convective heat

transfer

Significance of non-dimensional numbers, Use

of empirical correlations for convective heat

transfer


T1,R1&R4


transfer rate

Problems



transfer rate

Problems


L35

Illustrate Forced

convection through Flat

plates and horizontal

pipes

Forced convection through Flat plates and

horizontal pipes


T1,R1&R4

L36

Illustrate Free

Convection through

vertical plates, pipes

Free Convection through vertical plates, pipes


L37

Illustrate Concepts

about hydrodynamic and

thermodynamic

boundary layer along a

vertical plate

Concepts about hydrodynamic and

thermodynamic boundary layer along a vertical

plate


T1,R1&R4


transfer rate

Problems


L39

Illustrate Heat transfer

with phase change:

boiling -pool boiling

Heat transfer with phase change: boiling -pool

boiling


T1,R1&R4


transfer rate

Calculations on nucleate boiling



transfer rate

Critical heat flux and film boiling


L42

Understand

Condensation: Film wise

and drop wise

condensation

Condensation: Film wise and drop wise

condensation


T1,R1&R4

L43

Evaluate the heat

transfer rate in Film

condensation on vertical

and horizontal cylinders

using correlations

Film condensation on vertical and horizontal

cylinders using correlations


T1,R1&R4


transfer rate

Problems




L45

Understand Emission

Characteristics and Laws

of Black body Radiation

Emission Characteristics and Laws of Black

body Radiation.


T1,R1&R4

L46

Understand Irradiation,

Total and

monochromatic

quantities,

Irradiation, Total and monochromatic

quantities


T1,R1&R4

L47

Understand Laws of

Planck, Laws of Wien,

Kirchhoff, Lambert,

Stefan and Boltzmann

Laws of Planck, Laws of Wien, Kirchhoff,

Lambert, Stefan and Boltzmann.


T1,R1&R4

L48

Understand Heat

exchange between two

black bodies

Heat exchange between two black bodies


L49 Understand Concepts of

shape factor, Emissivity

Concepts of shape factor, Emissivity


L50 Discuss Heat exchange

between grey bodies

Heat exchange between grey bodies


L51

Understand Radiation

shields, electrical

analogy for radiation

networks

Radiation shields, electrical analogy for

radiation networks


T1,R1&R4


transfer rate

Problems



transfer rate

Problems


L54

Understand Heat

exchangers:

Classification of Heat

exchangers

Heat exchangers: Classification of Heat

exchangers


T1,R1&R4

L55

Understand Overall

heat transfer coefficient

and fouling factor

Overall heat transfer coefficient and fouling

factor


T1,R1&R4


LMTD method

Concepts of LMTD method



NTU method

Concepts of NTU method


L58

Evaluate the heat

transfer rate in Problems

using LMTD Method

Problems using LMTD Method




using NTU methods

Problems using NTU methods




on overall heat transfer

coefficient and fouling

factor

Problems on overall heat transfer coefficient

and fouling factor


T1,R1&R4




13.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

13 .9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Program Outcomes

a b c d e f g h i j k l m

I H S

II H

III H S

IV H S

V S S

Course Objectives Program Outcomes


I S H S H S S H S H H H

II H H S H S S H S S H H

III S H H H S S S S S H H

IV S H S S S S S S S H H

V H H S S S S S S S H H




OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

1. The fourier's law of heat transfer by conduction is expresses as [b]

a) Q=KA (dt/dx)

b)-KA (dt/dx)

c) Q=KA(dx/dt)

d) -KA (dx/dt)

2. The heat transfer is constant when [a]

a) Temperature remains constant with time

b) Temperature decrease with time

c) Temperature increases with time

d) None

6. A satellite is space exchanges heat with the surroundings by [c] a) Conduction

b) Convection

c) Radiation

d) One

7. Stefan-Boltzmann’s law is expressed as [a]

a) Q=

b) Q=

c) Q=

d) Q=

5. Heat transfer in liquids and gases is due to a) Conduction

b) Convection

c) Radiation

d) None

[b]

3. The thermal conductivity is expressed as a) W/mk

b)W/m2k

c)W/hmK

d)W/hm2 K

[a]

4. Heat transfer from higher temperature to low temperature takes place according to [c] a) Fourier law

b) First law of thermodynamics

c) Second law of thermodynamics

d) Zeros law of thermodynamics



10..All the three modes of heat transmission are involved in a) Melting of ice

b) Cooling of small metal casting in a quenching bath

c) Heat flow through the walls of a refrigerator

[d]

d) Automobile engine equipped with a thermo-siphon cooling system

11. Most unsteady heat flow occurs [b]

a) walls of refrigerator

b) annealing of castings

c) walls of furnace

d) through lagged pipes carrying steam

12. Most metals are good conductor of heat because of [d]

a) energy transport due to molecular vibration

b) migration of neutrons from hot end to cold end

c) lattice defects such as dislocations

d) presence of free electrons and frequent collision of atoms

8. The quantity of heat radiation is dependent on [c]

a) Area of the body

b) Shape of the body

c) Temperature of the body

d) All the above

9. Steady state heat flow means [c]

a) Negligible flow of heat

b) No difference of temperature between the bodies

c) Constant heat flow rate independent of time

d) Uniform rate in temperature rise of a body

13 .Heat conduction in gases is due to [b]

a) motion of electrons

b) elastic impact of molecules

c) mixing motion of different layers of gas

d) electromagnetic waves

14. With decrease in temperature the thermal conductivity of non-metallic amorphous solids [a]

a) decreases

b) increases

c) constant

d) unpredictable



15..Heat is closely related with [d]

a) energy

b) entropy

c) enthalpy

d) temperature

16. Which of the following is not necessary condition for fourier 's conduction heat equation. [c]

a) Steady state

b) One dimension heat flow

c) Constant value of thermal conductivity

d) Uniform temperatures at the wall surfaces

17. The essential condition for the transfer of heat from one body to another is [d]

a) both bodies must be in physical contact

b) Heat content of one body must be more than that of the other

c) one of the bodies must have high value of thermal conductivity

d) there must exist a temperature difference between the bodies

18) Cork is a good insulator because [a]

A) it is flexible and can be cast in to rolls

b) it can be powdered

c) it is porous

d) its density is low

19. All of the following are units of thermal conductivity except [a]

a) kcal/m-hr-'c

b) kJ/m-hr-K

c) W/m-s-K

d) cal/cm-s-'c

20. The least value of conductivity from the below [b]

a) rubber

b) air

c) water

Unit-II

1.Which has the highest thermal conductivity from the below [c]

a) Water

b) melting ice

c) solid ice

d) steam

2 .A composite slab has two layers of different materials with thermal conductivity kl and

k2.If each layer has same thickness the equivalent thermal conductivity of the slab would

be like [d]

a)klk2

b)kl+k2

c)(kl+k2)/(klk2)

d)(2klk2)/(kl+k2)



3. Three metal walls of same wall thickness and cross-sectional area have thermal

conductivities k,2k and 3k respectively, for the same heat transfers ,the temperature drops

across the wall will be in the ratio [b]

a) 1:2:3

b) 3:2:l

c)l:l:l

d) infinity

4 .A furnace is made of a brick wall of thickness 0.5m and conductivity .75W/mK.For the

same heat loss and temperature drop what should be the thickness of diatomite earth of

thermal conductivity 0.15W/mK? [b]

a)0.05m

b)0.1m

c)0.2m

d)0.5m

5. Two walls of same thickness and cross sectional area have thermal conductivities in the

ratio 1:2.If the same temperature difference is maintained across the wall faces the ratio of

the heat flow Q1/Q2 will be [a]

a) 1/2

b)l

c)2

d)4

6. The average thermal conductivities of water and air conform to the ratio [c]

a) 5:1

b) 5:l

c) 5:l

d) 0:l

7. The temperature variation with time in the lumped parameter model is [a]

a) exponential

b) sinusoidal

c) cubic

d) linear

8. The number is generally associated with natural convection heat transfer [d]

a) prandtl

b) weber

c) nusselt

d) grashoff

9. A substance above critical temperature exists as [c]

a) Liquid

b) solid

c) gas

d) wet vapor

10 what happens when the thickness of insulation on a pipe exceeds the critical value? [b]

a) Decrease in heat flow

b) increase in heat flow

c) constant

d) none



11 . fins are provided on heat transferring surface in order to increase [a]

a) heat transfer area

b) heat transfer coefficient

c) temperature gradient

d) mechanical strength of the equipment

12. The temperature at the tip will be minimum when the rod is [b]

a)aluminum

b)steel

c) copper

d)silver

13. Critical thickness of insulation for spheres is given by [d]

a)k/h

b)k/4(phi)h

c)h/2k

d)2k/h

14. Critical radius of insulation [b]

a) heat loss decrease with addition of insulation

b) heat loss increases with addition of insulation

c) decrease in heat flux

d) d) none

15. Three fins of equal length and diameter but made of aluminum, brass and cast iron are

heated to 200'c at one end. If the fins dissipate heat to the surroundings air at 25'c the

temperature at the free end will be least in case of [a]

a)aluminum fin

b) brass fin

c)cast iron fin

d)none

16. Consider the following data inside heat transfer coefficient =25W/mA2K

outside heat transfer coefficient=25W/mA2K [d]

Thermal conductivity of bricks?(15cm thick)=0.15W/mK the

overall transfer coefficient will be then closer to

a) inverse of heat transfer coefficient

b) heat transfer coefficient

c) thermal conductivity of bricks

d) Heat transfer coefficient based on thermal conductivity of bricks alone

17. A steam pipe is to be lined with two layers of insulating materials of different thermal

conductivities, for less heat transfer [a]

a) the better insulating must be put inside

b) the better insulation must be put outside



c) any of the two insulations may be placed inside or outside

d) the temperature of steam must be taken into account

18. While deciding as to which insulation is put is the temperature distribution (t-ta)/(to-ta) for a fin

with insulated tip is given by [c]

a) exp(-mx)

b) [exp(mx)+exp(-mx)]/2

c) [cosh m(l-x)] /cosh ml

d) cosh m (1-x) +cos h ml

19. A fin protrudes from a surface which is held at temperature higher than that of its

environments. The heat transferred away from the fin is [c]

a) Heat escaping from the tip of the fin

b) heat conducted along the fin lengthy

c) Convective heat transfer from the fin surface

d) none

20. Fin efficiency is defined as the ratio of the heat transferred across the fin surface to the

theatrical heat transfer across am equal area held at [c]

a) Temperature of fin end

b) constant temperature equal to that of base

c) Average temperature of fin

d )none

UNIT-III

1. In transient heat conduction, the two significant dimensions parameters are [c]

a) Reynolds number and print number

b) Biot number and Fourier number

c) Reynolds number and biota number

d) Fourier number and Reynolds number

2. The dimensionless number is relevant in transient heat conduction [a]

a) Fourier number

b)Grashoff number

c)prandtl number

d)Reynolds number

3. Which of the following dimensionless number gives an indication of the ratio of internal

(conduction) resistance to the surface (convection) resistance? [b]

a) Fourier number

b)biot number

c)mussel number

d)Stanton number

4. Lumped parameter analysis for transient heat conduction is essentially valid for [a]

A)Bi<0.1

b)Bi<0.5

C) Bi<10

d) Bi->infinity



Where Bi is the non dimensional biot number

5. In the non-dimensional boit number, the characteristic length is the ration of [a]

a) Volume of solid to its surface area

b) Surface area to volume of solid

c) Surface area to perimeter of solid

d) Perimeter to surface area of solid

6. The temperature distribution during transient heat conduction in a solid does not depend upon [c]

a) Location of point within the solid

b) biota number h/k

c) Print number

d) Fourier number

7. Heisler charts are used to determine the transient heat flow rate and temperature distribution

when [d]

a) Solids possess infinitely large thermal conductivity

b) Internal conduction resistance is small and the convective resistance is large

c) Internal conduction resistance is large and the convective resistance is small

d) Both conduction and convection resistance are almost of equal importance

8. The temperature distribution at a certain instant of time in a concrete slab during curing is given

by

T=3xA2+3x+16

Where x is in cm and T is in Kelvin

The rate of change of temperature with time would be [d]

a)0.0009K/s

b) 0.0045K/S

c)-0.0012K/s

d)-0.0018K/s

Assume the thermal diffusivity to be 0.003cmA2

9. Is the transmission of heat by molecular collision [a]

a) Conduction

b) convection

c) radiation

d) none

10. Cork is a good insulator because it is [c]

A) Semiconductor

b) metal

c) porous

d) none

11 The thermal conductivity of ice is nearly times the thermal conductivity of water [d]

a)l

b)2



c)3

d)4

12. Non isotropic thermal conductivity is exhibited in case of [d]

a) Asbestos

b) copper

c) zinc

d) wood

13 Fins are usually provided to a heat exchanger surface in order to augment heat transfer [a]

a) Increasing the surface area

b) Decreasing the surface area

c) Surface area has not effect

d) Can not be determined

a) Water

b) liquid metals

c) salt solution

d) sugar solution

17 The emissive power of a body depends on [d]

A) Physical nature

b) nature of body

c) temperature of body

d) all the above

18. The wavelength for maximum emissive power is given by [d]

A) kickoff s law

b) stefanboltzman law

c) Fourier law

14.. For a cylindrical rod with uniformly distributed heat sources the thermal gradient dated at half

the radius location will be [b]

of surface

a) 1/4

b)l/2

c)2

d)4

15. Transient conduction means [d]

a) Very little heat transfer

b) Heat transfer for a short time

c) Heat transfer with a very small temperature difference

d) Conduction when the temperature at a point varies with time

16.Least value of print number can be expressed in case of [c]



d) wien law

19."All bodies above absolute zero temperature emit radiation". This statement is based [c]

a) Stefan s law

b) planks law

c) provost theory

d) wiens s law

20. Methods is used for find the thermal conductivity of rubber [b]

a) Searle

b) lee's disc

c) cylindrical shell

d) laby an hercus

Unit-IV

1. Heat transfer by radiation is encountered least in [b]

a)boiler furnace

b)insulated steam pip

c)electric bulb

d)nuclear reactor

2. A perfectly black body absorbs all the incident radiation [a]

a) allows all the icident radiation to pass through it b) reflects all the incident light

d) none

3. for a perfect black body [a]

a) absorptivity=l , reflectivity=0 transmissivity=0

b )absorptivity=0 ,reflectivity= 1 transmissivity=0

c) Absorptivity reflectivity transmissivity=l

d) absorptive + transmissivity=l,reflectivity=0

4.For absolutely white or specular body [b]

a) absorptivity^ , reflectivity=0 transmissivity=0

b) absorptivity=0 ,reflectivity= 1 transmissivity=0

c) absorptivity reflectivity transmissivity=l

d) absorptivity + transmissivity=l,reflectivity=:0

5.For a transparent body [c]




d) absorptivity + transmissivity=l,refiectivity=0

6. For a opaque body [d]




d) absorptivity + transmissivity=l,reflectivity=0

7.A diathermananous [c]



a) shines as a result of incident radiation

b) gets heated up as a result of absorption of ncident radiation

c) allows all the incident radiation to pass through it

d) partly absorbs and partly reflects the incident radiation

8. Solar radiation is mainly scattered or transmitted but not absorbed by the atmosphere this

characteristic manifests because [a]

a) atmosphere has very low absorptivity

b) solar radiation is very intense

c) most of solar radiation is scattered and little remains for absorption

d) none

9. Gases have poor [b]

a) absorptivity

b) reflectivity

c) transmissivity

d) none

10. The ratio of emissive power of body to the total emissive power of a blackbody at the same

Ternperature. [d]

a)absorptivity

b) reflectivity

c) transmissivity

d) emmisivity

11. Which of the following heat flow situations pertains to free or natural convection? [a]

a) Cooling of billets in atmosphere

b) Cooling of I.C engines

c) Flow of water inside the condenser tubes

d) All the above

12..Number has a significant role in forced convection [b]

a) Mach

b) Reynolds

c) Prandtl

d) Peclet

13. In convective heat transfer, the Nusselt number [c]

a) Represents the ratio of viscous to inertia force

b) Signifies the velocity gradient at the surface

c) Is the ratio of molecular momentum diffusivity to thermal diffusivity

d) Is the ratio of conduction to convection resistance

14. Nusselt number, for forced convection, is a function of and……..number. [a]

a) Reynold, Prandtl

b) Prandtl, Grashoff

c) Reynolds, Grashoff

d) None of the above



15..In case of laminar flow over a plate, the convection heat transfer coefficient [d]

a) Decreases with increase in free stream velocity

b) Increases with distance

c) Increases if a higher viscosity fluid is used

d) Increases if a denser fluid is used

16. The temperature gradient in the fluid flowing over a heated plate will be. [a]

a) Zero at the top of the thermal boundary layer

b) very steep at the surface

c) Zero at the surface plate

d) Positive at the surface

17. The ratio of hydro dynamic to thermal boundary layer thickness [a]

a) Varies as one-third power of Prandtl number

b) Varies as two-third power of Stanton number

c) Varies as four-fifth power of Nussetl number

d) d) Varies as the root of Prandtl number.

18. When Prandtl number is equal to the hydrodynamic and thermal boundary and

thermal boundary layers are identical. [a]

a) 0.2

b) 1

c) 15

d)30

19. For a free convection, Nusselt number is a function of [a]

a) Prandtl and Grashoff number

b) Reynolds and Grashoff number

c) Reynolds number only

d) Reynolds and Prandtl number

20. For the natural convection heat transfer, Nusselt number is a function of [a]

a) Prandtl and Grashoff number

b) Reynolds and Grashoff number

c) Reynolds and Prandtl number

d) Stanton number and Peclet number

Unit-V

1. The temperature gradient in the fluid flowing over a heated plate will be. [a]

a) Zero at the top of the thermal boundary layer



b) Very steep at the surface

c) Zero at the surface plate

d) Positive at the surface

2. The ratio of hydro dynamic to thermal boundary layer thickness [a]

a) Varies as one-third power of Prandtl number

b) Varies as two-third power of Stanton number

c) Varies as four-fifth power of Nussetl number

d) Varies as the root of Prandtl number.

3. When Prandtl number is equal to the hydrodynamic and thermal boundary and

thermal boundary layers are identical. [b]

a) 0.2

b) 1

c)15

d)30

4. For a free convection, Nusselt number is a function of [a]

a) Prandtl and Grashoff number b) Reynolds and Grashoff number

c) Reynolds number only d) Reynolds and Prandtl number

5. For the natural convection heat transfer, Nusselt number is a function of [a]

a) Prandtl and Grashoff number b) Reynolds and Grashoff number

c) Reynolds and Prandtl number d) Stanton number and Peclet number.

6. Which of the following heat flow situations pertains to free or natural convection? [a]

a) Cooling of billets in atmosphere b) Cooling of I.C engines

c) Flow of water inside the condenser tubes

d) All the above

7. number has a significant role in forced convection [b]

a) Mach

b) Reynolds

c) Prandtl

d) Peclet

8. In convective heat transfer, the Nusselt number [c]

a) Represents the ratio of viscous to inertia force

b) Signifies the velocity gradient at the surface

c) Is the ratio of molecular momentum diffusivity to thermal diffusivity

d) Is the ratio of conduction to convection resistance



9. Nusselt number, for forced convection, is a function of and------number [a]

a) Reynold, Prandtl

b) Prandtl, Grashoff

c) Reynolds, Grashoff


10. In case of laminar flow over a plate, the convection heat transfer coefficient [d]

a) Decreases with increase in free stream velocity

b) Increases with distance

c) Increases if a higher viscosity fluid is used

d) Increases if a denser fluid is use

11. Heat transfer by radiation is encountered least in [b]

a) Boiler furnace

b) Insulated steam pipe

c) Electric bulb

d) Nuclear reactor

12. A perfect black body [a]

a) Absorbs all the incident radiation

b) Allows all the incident radiation to pass through it

c) Reflects all the incident radiation

d) Has its surface coated with lamp black or graphite

13. A diathermanous body [a]

a) Shines as a result of incident radiation

b) Gets heated up as a result of absorption of incident radiation

c) Allows all the incident radiation to pass through it

d) Partly absorbs and partly reflects the incident radiation

14. A body which partly absorbs and which partly reflects but does not allow any radiation to pass

through it is called [a]

a) Diathermanous

b) Opaque

c) Grey

d) Specular

15. Choose the false statement [d]

a) Snow is nearly black to thermal radiation

b) Absorption of radiation occurs in a very thin layer of material near the surface

c) transmissivity varies with wavelength of incident radiation

d) Most of the engineering materials have rough surfaces, and these rough syrfaces give regular

(specular) reflections

16. The steam condenser in a thermal power plant is a heat exchanger of the type [c]

a) Direct contact



19. In a double pipe parallel flow heat exchanger, there occurs condensation of saturated steam over

the inner tube. Subsequently, the entrance and exit connections of the cooling medium are

interchanged. The ratio of steam condensation [c]

a) Will increase

b) Will decrease

c) Will remain unchanged

d) May increase or decrease depending upon saturated temperature of steam and inlet temperature

of cooling medium

20.The requirement of transfer of large amount of heat is usually met by [a]

a) Increasing the length of the tube

b) Decreasing the diameter of the tube

c) Increasing the number of tubes

d) Having multiple tube or shell passes

b) Regenerator

c) Recuperator


17. The normal automobile radiator is a heat exchanger of the type [d]

a) Direct contact

b) Parallel flow

c) Counter flow

d) Cross flow

18. Choose the correct statement with respect to a counter flow heat exchanger [c]

a) Both fluids at inlet are in their coldest state

b) Both fluids at outlet are in their hottest state

c) Both fluids at inlet are in their hottest state

d) One fluid is hot and the other is cold at their inlet



TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

S. No

Question

Bloom

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Tutorials


1 How does the science of heat transfer differ from the

science of thermodynamics?

Analyse A B

2 What is the driving force for (a) heat transfer, (b) electric

current flow, and (c) fluid flow?

Analyse A

3 What is heat flux? How is it related to the heat transfer concept A B

4 What are the mechanisms of energy transfer to a closed

system? How is heat transfer distinguished from the other

forms of energy transfer?.

concept A

5 How are heat, internal energy, and thermal energy related

to each other?

Evaluate B

6 Define thermal conductivity and explain its significance in

heat transfer?

concept A

7 What are the mechanisms of heat transfer? How are they

distinguished from each other?

Evaluate B

8 How does heat conduction differ from convection?. Distinguishn g

c

9 How does forced convection differ from natural Distinguish F

10 Which is a better heat conductor, diamond or silver? Analyse F

UNIT-I


1 Define basic laws of heat transfer? analyse a

2 Discuss basic laws of 3 modes of heat transfer? Discuss a

3 Derive general conduction equation in Cartesian coordinates? Derive a

4 Derive conduction equation in cylindrical coordinates? Derive a

5 Derive conduction equation in spherical coordinate systems? Derive a

6 What are the applications of heat transfer? Applicatio a

7 What are the different forms of heat transfer? Describe c

8 Describe different types of boundary conditions apply to heat conduction

Analyse b

9 Explain log mean area and geometric mean area? Explain a

10 Derive the critical radius of insulation? Derive a



UNIT-II short answer questions

1 How does transient heat transfer differ from steady heat transfer? How does

Analyse a

2 From a heat transfer point of view, what is the difference between isotropic

Analyse e

3 What is heat generation in a solid? Give examples. concept e

4 What is a thermal symmetry boundary condition? Analyse e

5 A container consists of two spherical layers, A and B, that are in perfect

Evaluate

f

6 Does heat generation in a solid violate the first law of thermodynamics,

Understand f

7 Is the thermal conductivity of a medium, in general, constant or does it vary

with temperature?

Understand g

8 How is the combined heat transfer coefficient defined? What convenience

Understand g

9 What is thermal contact resistance? How is it related to thermal contact

concept e

10 What is the difference between the fin effectiveness and the fin efficiency

Distinguish e

S. No Question Blooms

Taxono

my

Levels

Course

Outcom

e

UNIT – II-LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1 Derive one dimensional steady state conduction equation in derive e

2 Explain the following (i) Logmean area (ii)geometric mean Explain g

3 What is critical thickness of insulation explain Define e

4 Derive the conduction in onedimensional case for a Derive f

5 What are the assumptions for heat transfer analysis in case analyse e

6 Derive the expression for heat transfer in fins in case of (i)Rectangular plate

Derive e

7 How do you estimate error in temperature measurment Estimate f

8 Explain briefly (i)Fin effectiveness (ii) Fin effeciency Explain e

9 Explain the heat transfer analysis in composite wall evaluate e

10 Derive expression for critical thickness of insulation for a cylinder.

Derive f



S.No Question

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT – III Short answer questions

1 What is lumped system analysis? concept a

2 When is lumped system analysis it applicable? application a

3 In what medium is the lumped system analysis more likely to be applicable:

analyse a b

4 Obtain relations for the characteristic lengths of a large plane wall of

Analyse c

5 What is an infinitely long cylinder? concept af

6 Define Biot number define af

7 What is the physical significance of the Fourier number? Evaluate a f

8 Why are the transient temperature charts prepared using

nondimensionalized quantities such as the Biot and

Evaluate f



9 What is a semi-infinite medium? Give examples of solid

bodies that can be Analyse f

10 Under what conditions can a plane wall be treated as a semi-infinite

analysis f

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Unit-III-Long answer questions

1 Define lump Understandin a

2 Explain the concept of lumped annalysis Explain a b

3 Derive the expression for heat transfer under transient mode

derive g

4 Define Biot number and Fourier number Define f

5 Explain how biot number help in transient conduction problem

Application f

6 What are heisleir charts Application f

7 Enumerate steps for solving long cylinders using analysis a f

8 Enumerate steps for heat transfer analysis in slabs using heislier charts.

analysis b f

9 What is forced convection? How does it differ from natural convection? Is

concept a f

10 What is the physical significance of the Nusselt number? How is it defined

evaluate a g

S. No

Question

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Unit-IV short answer questions

1 What is forced convection? How does it differ from natural convection? Is

concept a f

2 What is the physical significance of the Nusselt number? evaluate a g

3 Define incompressible flow and incompressible fluid. Must the flow of a

concept b f

4 How does turbulent flow differ from laminar flow? For which flow is the

evaluate b f



5 What is the physical significance of the Reynolds number?

How is it analyse f

6 What is turbulent thermal conductivity? What is it caused by? evaluate f

7 State Newton’s law of cooling Is the acceleration of a fluid particle necessarily zero in steady flow? Explain.

concept a c

8 What are the advantages of non dimensional zing the analyse f

9 How is Reynolds analogy expressed? What is the value of it? Evaluate f

10 What is drag? What causes it? Why do we usually try to minimize it?

concept a d

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

Unit-IV Long answer questions

2 What is boundary layer thickness what do you mean by laminar and turbulent boundary layers.

Evaluate g

3 What is critical Reynolds number for flow over flat plate Evaluate f

4 Define local and mean heat transfer coefficient. On what factors h value

Analyse f

5 Write the expression for continuity equation Derive b

6 Derive the expression for Navier stokes equation Derive b

7 Derive the energy equation Derive b

8 State Buckingham pi theorem .What are the merits and Describe a b d

9 What do you mean by VonKorman ‘s integral method. and derive drag force and heat transfer coefficient for flow over a flat plate

Understand g f

10 Explain Reynold’s analogy? Understand a f

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V Tutorials Short Answer Questions

1 Classify heat exchangers according to flow type and explain the

characteristics of each type.

Classify

classify

a

a

2 Classify heat exchangers according to construction ? classify a

3 What is a regenerative heat exchanger? How does a static type

of

Regenerative heat exchanger differ from a dynamic type?

concept b



4 What are the heat transfer mechanisms involved during heat

transfer from the hot to the cold fluid?

Applicatio

n

c

5 Draw a 2-shell-passes and 8-tube-passes shell-andtube heat exchanger.

design d

6 What are the common causes of fouling in a heat exchanger? How does fouling affect heat transfer and pressure drop?

concept f

7 How is the thermal resistance due to fouling in a heat exchanger

accounted for? How do the fluid velocity and temperature affect fouling?

create b

8 Can the logarithmic mean temperature difference Tlm of a heat exchanger be a negative quantity? Explain

Evaluate c

9 When the outlet temperatures of the fluids in a heat exchanger are not known, is it still practical to use the LMTD method?

derive b

10 What are the common approximations made in the analysis of

heat exchangers?

derive d

Sl.No.

Question

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V Tutorials Long answer questions 1 Classify heat exchangers Classify a

2 What are the applications of heat exchangers.. Applications b

3 What do you mean by fouling factor..causes of fouling Define c

4 What are shell and tube heat exchangers? Analyse a

5 Derive LMTD for parallel flow heat exchangers Derive e

6 Derive LMTD for counter flow heat exchangers Derive e

7 Define effectiveness and Ntu of heat exchanger Define e

8 Derive expression for effectiveness of parallel flow heat exchanger Evaluate e

9 Derive expression for effectiveness of counterl flow heat Evaluate e

10 Derive NTU of parallel flow and counterflow heat exchangers. .. Evaluate e

ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Short Answer Questions 1 How does the science of heat transfer differ from the science

of thermodynamics? Analyse a b

2 Discuss applications of heat transfer? Analyse a

3 What is heat flux? How is it related to the heat transfer rate? concept a b



4 What are the mechanisms of energy transfer to a closed

system? How is heat transfer distinguished from the other forms of energy transfer?.

concept a

5 How are heat, internal energy, and thermal energy related to each other?

Evaluate b

6 Does heat generation in a solid violate the first law of thermodynamics, which states that energy cannot be created or destroyed? Explain

Understand f

7 Is the thermal conductivity of a medium, in general, constant or does it vary with temperature?

Understand g

8 How is the combined heat transfer coefficient defined? What convenience does it offer in heat transfer calculations?

Understand g

9 What is thermal contact resistance? How is it related to thermal contact conductance?

concept e

10 What is the difference between the fin effectiveness and the fin efficiency

Distinguish e

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Long Answer Questions 1 Derive conduction equation in cylindrical coordinates? Derive a

2 Derive conduction equation in spherical coordinate systems? Derive a

3 What are the applications of heat transfer? Application a

4 What are the different forms of heat transfer? Describe c

5 Describe different types of boundary conditions apply to heat conduction problem?

Analyse b

6 Derive the expression for heat transfer in fins in case of (i)Rectangular platefin of uniform cross section (ii)insulated end

Derive e

7 How do you estimate error in temperature measurement Estimate f

8 Explain briefly (i)Fin effectiveness (ii) Fin efficiency Explain e

9 Explain the heat transfer analysis in composite wall evaluate e

10 Derive expression for critical thickness of insulation for a cylinder.

Derive F



Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments

ShortAnswer Questions 1 Define Biot number define af

2 What is the physical significance of the Fourier number? Evaluate a f

3 Why are the transient temperature charts prepared using nondimensionalized quantities such as the Biot and Fourier numbers instead of the actual variables such as thermal conductivity and time?.

Evaluate f

4 What is a semi-infinite medium? Give examples of solid bodies that can be treated as semi-infinite mediums for heat transfer purposes?

Analyse f

5 Under what conditions can a plane wall be treated as a semi- infinite medium?

analysis f

6 What is turbulent thermal conductivity? What is it caused by?

evaluate f

7 State Newtons law of cooling Is the acceleration of a fluid particle necessarily zero in steady flow? Explain.

concept a c

8 What are the advantages of non dimensionalizing the convection equations?

analyse f

9 How is Reynolds analogy expressed? What is the value of it? What are its limitations?

Evaluate f

10 What is drag? What causes it? Why do we usually try to minimize it?

concept a d

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments Long Answer Questions

1 Define Biot number and Fourier number Define f

2 Explain how biot number help in transient conduction problem

Application f

3 What are heisleir charts Application f

4 Enumerate steps for solving long cylinders using heislier charts

analysis a f

5 Enumerate steps for heat transfer analysis in slabs using heislier charts.

analysis b f



6 Derive the expression for Navier stokes equation Derive b

7 Derive the energy equation Derive b

8 State Buckingham pi theorem .What are the merits and demerits

Describe a b d

9 What do you mean by VonKorman‘s integral method. and derive drag force and heat transfer coefficient for flow over a flat plate

Understanding g f

10 Explain Reynolds’s analogy? Understanding a f

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments

Short Answer Questions 1 Why are finned surfaces frequently used in practice? Why

are the finned surfaces referred to as heat sinks in the electronics industry?

evaluate f

2 When is natural convection negligible and when is it not negligible in forced convection heat transfer?

concept a c

3 When neither natural nor forced convection is negligible, is it correct to calculate each independently and add them to determine the total convection heat transfer?

analyse f

4 Under what conditions does natural convection enhance forced convection, and under what conditions does it hurt forced convection?

Evaluate f

5 Why are heat sinks with closely packed fins not suitable for natural convection heat transfer, although they increase the heat transfer surface area more?

concept a d

6 What is the modified latent heat of vaporization? For what is it used? How does it differ from the ordinary latent heat of vaporization?

concept g

7 What is condensation? How does it occur? Apply a b

8 How does the presence of a non-condensable gas in a vapor influence the condensation heat transfer?

Evaluate d

9 Name the different boiling regimes in the order they occur in a vertical tube during flow boiling

phenomena d

10 Discuss some methods of enhancing pool boiling heat transfer permanently.

Concept c



Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments

Long Answer Questions 1 Explain the concept of Nusselt’s theory of laminar flow Explain f

2 Explain the conditions for which Dittus-Boelter equation can be used to determine heat transfer coefficient

Explain c

3 What is Rayleigh number Define f

4 What do you mean by hydrodynamic entry length. Define d

5 Give the steps to find heat transfer in natural convection. Analyse c e

6 What is nucleate boiling explain Explain f

7 Explain film boiling explain Explain f

8 Write the correlations for boiling heat transfer incase of nucleate bioling

Enumerate f g

9 Differentiate between different types of condensers Differentiate b d

10 Write correlations for condensation heat transfer enumerate f

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Assignments

Short Answer Questions 1 Derive expression for radiant energy between two small

gray surfaces Evaluate a

2 Explain radiosity Evaluate b

3 Explain irradiation concept c

4 Write expression for monochromatic emissive power Expression g

5 Write expression for blackbody radiation. Expression g

6 Define the properties emissivity and absorptivity. When are these two properties equal to each other?

Define f e

7 What is a graybody? How does it differ from a blackbody? What is a diffuse gray surface?

Define e

8 What does the view factor represent? When is the view factor from a surface to itself not zero?

Evaluate b f



9 What are the summation rule and the superposition rule

for view factors? concept b d f

10 What are the two methods used in radiation analysis? How do these two methods differ?

Describe f a

UNIT-IV

Assignments

Long Answer Questions 1 Define the properties emissivity and absorptivity. When

are these two properties equal to each other? Define f e

2 What is a graybody? How does it differ from a blackbody? What is a diffuse gray surface?

Define e

3 What does the view factor represent? When is the view factor from a surface to itself not zero?

Evaluate b f

4 What are the summation rule and the superposition rule for view factors?

concept b d f

5 What are the two methods used in radiation analysis? How do these two methods differ?

Describe f a

6 Derive expression for radiant energy between two small gray surfaces

Evaluate a

7 Explain radiosity Evaluate b

8 Explain irradiation concept c

9 Write expression for monochromatic emissive power Expression g

10 Write expression for blackbody radiation. Expression g

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Assignments

Short Answer Questions 1 What are the common causes of fouling in a heat exchanger?

How does fouling affect heat transfer and pressure drop? concept f

2 How is the thermal resistance due to fouling in a heat exchanger accounted for? How do the fluid velocity and temperature affect fouling?

create b

3 Can the logarithmic mean temperature difference Tlm of a heat exchanger be a negative quantity? Explain

Evaluate c

4 When the outlet temperatures of the fluids in a heat exchanger are not known, is it still practical to use the LMTD

derive b



method? Explain.

5 What are the common approximations made in the analysis of heat exchangers?

derive d

6 Water is to be boiled at atmospheric pressure in a mechanically polished Stainless steel pan placed on top of a heating unit, as shown in Figure 10–15. The inner surface of the bottom of the pan is maintained at 108°C. If the diameter of the bottom of the pan is 30 cm, determine (a) the rate of heat transfer to the water and (b) the rate of evaporation of water.

solve g

7 Water in a tank is to be boiled at sea level by a 1-cm- diameter nickel Plated steel heating element equipped with electrical resistance wires inside, in. Determine the maximum heat flux that can be attained in the nucleate boiling regime and the surface temperature of the heater surface in that case.

Apply c

8 Water is boiled at atmospheric pressure by a horizontal polished copper Heating element of diameter D _ 5 mm and emissivity _ _ 0.05 immersed in water, If the surface temperature of the heating wire is350°C, determine the rate of heat transfer from the wire to the water per unit length of the wire.

evaluate f

9

Saturated steam at atmospheric pressure condenses on a 2-m- high and 3-m Wide vertical plate that is maintained at 80°C by circulating cooling water through the other side. Determine (a) the rate of heat transfer by condensation to the plate and (b) the rate at which the condensate drips off the plate at the bottom.

Understand f

10 What would your answer be to the preceding example problem if the plate were tilted 30° from the vertical?

apply b

Sl.No.

Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Assignments

Long Answer Questions 1 Derive LMTD for counter flow heat exchangers Derive e

2 Define effectiveness and Ntu of heat exchanger Define e

3 Derive expression for effectiveness of parallel flow heat exchanger

Evaluate e

4 Derive expression for effectiveness of counter flow heat exchanger

Evaluate e

5 Derive NTU of parallel flow and counter flow heat exchangers. ..

Evaluate e

6 A chemical having specific heat of 3.3kJ/kgK flowing at the rate of 20000kg/h enters a parallel flow heat exchanger at

solve b



1200C. The flow rate o0f cooling water is 50000kg/h with2 an

inlet temperature of 20 C. The heat transfer area2is 10m and the overall heat transfer coefficient is 1050W/m K. Find (i) the effectiveness of the heat exchanger, (ii)the outlet temperatures of water and chemical. Take for water cp=4.186kJ/kgK

7 In a double-pipe counter flow heat exchanger the inner tube has a diameter of 20mm and very little thickness. The inner diameter of the outer tube is 30mm.Water flows through the inner tube at a rate of 0.5kg/s and the oil flows through the shell at a rate of 0.8kg/s. Take the average temperatures of the water and the oil as 470C and 800C respectively and assume fully developed flow. Determine the overall heat transfer coefficient. Given: for water at 470C, ρ=0.637W/mK , nu =0.59x10-6m2/s and Pr=3.79. For oil at 800C, ρ=852kg/m3, k=0.138W/m K , nu =37.5x10-6m2/s and Pr=490.

Apply b

8 The condenser of a large steam power plant is a shell-andtube heat Exchanger having a single shell and 30000tubes, with each tube making two passes. The tubes are thin-walled with 25mm diameter and steam condenses on the outside of

the tubes with h0=11kW/m2K. The cooling water flowing through the tubes is 30000kg/s and the heat transfer rate is 2GW. Water enters at 200C while steam condenses at 500C. Find the length of the tubes in one pass. Properties of water

at 270C are cp=4.18kJ/kgK, µ =855x10-6Ns/m2 , k=0.613W/mK and Pr=5.83

evaluate b

9

. A double-pipe (shell-and-tube) heat exchanger is constructed of a stainless steel(k _ 15.1 W/m · °C) inner tube of inner diameter Di _ 1.5 cm and outer diameter Do _ 1.9 cm and an outer shell of inner diameter 3.2 cm. The convection heat transfer coefficient is given to be hi _ 800 W/m2 · °C on the inner surface of the tube and ho _ 1200 W/m2 · °C on the outer surface. For a fouling factor of Rf, i _ 0.0004 m2 · °C/ W on the tube side and Rf, 0.0001 m2 · °C/ W on the shell side, determine (a) the thermal resistance of the heat exchanger per unit length and (b) the overall heat transfer coefficients, Ui and Uo based on the inner and outer surface areas of the tube, respectively

solve c

10 Steam in the condenser of a power plant is to be condensed at a temperature of30°C with cooling water from a nearby lake, which enters the tubes of the condenser at 14°C and leaves at 22°C. The surface area of the tubes is 45m2, and the overall heat transfer coefficient is 2100 W/m2 · °C. Determine the mass flow rate of the cooling water needed and the rate of condensation of the steam in the condenser.

apply f


13.NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING METHODS

13.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Code A12125

Course title Non Destructive Testing Methods

Course Structure Lectures Tutorials Practical’s Credits

3 1 - 3

Course Coordinator Mr V.Vamshi, Asst Professor,

Team of Instructors Mr V.Vamshi, Asst Professor, A Udaya Deepika

I.COURSE OVERVIEW:

The aim is to introduce students the overview of the non destructive testing methods of materials.

The course covers NDE, Ultrasonic, and MPI testing of metal parts. It gives an idea about

selection of the testing criteria. It briefly describes the thermo-graph and radio graph methods of

testing and provides selection properties for different tests

13.2 PREREQUISITES:


UG 3 4

Basics of NDT techniques

Basic idea about selection of the testing criteria

11.3 COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS:



Exam Marks

Total

Marks There shall be two midterm

examinations.

Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and objective type tests.

The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60 minutes duration.

Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the student has to answer 2 questions, each carrying 5 marks.

The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20 minutes duration. It consists of 10 Multiple choice and 10 objective type

75 100


questions, the student has to answer all the questions and each carries half mark.

First midterm examination shall be

conducted for the first two and half units of syllabus and second midterm examination shall be conducted for the remaining portion.

Assignment Five marks are earmarked for

assignments.

There shall be two assignments in every

theory course. Marks shall be awarded considering the average of two assignments in each course.



a

Identify of the Non Destructive

Testing Methods Quiz/ PPT/Black Board

b Understand the detection of

manufacturing defects Quiz/ PPT/Black Board

c

Understands the detection of

material characterization Quiz/ PPT/Black Board

d

Outline the methods and uses of

testing – principles Quiz/ PPT/Black Board

e

Learns about different

inspection methods Class Test

f

Get a brief idea about

applications of NDT

Quiz/ PPT/Black Board





2 I Assignment lot - 5


4 II Assignment lot - 5



Total 100

13.5 COURSE OBJECTIVES AND COURSE OUTCOMES

S.No COURSE OBJECTIVES COURSE OUTCOMES

BLOOMS

LEVEL

I. Identify the basic methods of

testing

Define different types of

tests carried out on

components or

material.

BL 1

II. Discuss the concept of non

destructive testing

Explain about non

destructive testing

BL 2

III. Describe the various types of

NDT tests carried out on

components

Examine various types

of NDT tests carried out

on components

BL 3

IV. Analyze the different types of

test carried out on components

and surfaces

Analyze the different

types of test

BL 4

V. Determine different properties

of materials suitable for NDT test

Determine whether

flaws in material can be

detected by different

NDT test

BL 5

VI. Summarize the various types of

non destructive test used to

determine the surface cracks

Design the different flaw

detection techniques

basing on the flaws

BL 6



Program Outcomes Level Proficiency assessed by

Blooms Level

A

Ability to apply the technical knowledge about

different types of tests carried out on

Components or material.

H Assignment questions

Remember

B

Ability to design and conduct engineering

experiments, as well as to analysis and design

of models.

S Mini and Micro

Projects Create

C

Ability to design, Analysis and manufacture

systems, component, or process to meet desired

needs, within realistic constraints.

H Assignment questions &

Projects Create

D An ability to function on multi – disciplinary

teams. S

Mini and Micro Projects

Create

E An ability to identify, formulate and solve

engineering problems. S

Micro Project Models

Apply

F An understanding of professional, social and

ethical responsibility. N ------- Understand

G An ability to communicate effectively. S Micro Projects

models questions

Apply

H

The broad education necessary to understand

the impact of engineering solutions in a global,

economic, environmental, and societal context.

H Assignment questions

understand

I An ability to recognize the need for and an

ability to engage in life – long learning. S

Class Test & Seminars

Remember

J An ability to gain knowledge of contemporary

issues. S

Seminars

Remember


K

An ability to use the techniques, skills, and

modern engineering tools necessary for

engineering practice.

S

Class Tests & Group Activity

in class room

Apply

L

Graduates are able to participate and succeed in

competitive examination like GRE, GATE,

TOEFL, GMAT etc.

H Main project Apply

M

Apply engineering and management knowledge

and techniques to estimate time and resources

needed to complete aerospace/Mechanical

engineering projects.

S Mini and Micro

Projects Apply

N Able to recognize the challenging and

rewarding careers in aerospace. S ------ Remember


13.7 SYLLABUS

UNIT I :

Overview of NDT - NDT Versus Mechanical testing, Overview of the Non Destructive Testing

Methods for the detection of manufacturing defects as well as material characterization. Relative

merits and limitations, various physical characteristics of materials and their applications in

NDT, Visual inspection.

UNIT II

SURFACE NDE METHODSLiquid Penetrant Testing – Principles, types and properties of

liquid penetrants, developers, advantages and limitations of various methods, Testing Procedure,

Interpretation of results. Magnetic Particle Testing- Theory of magnetism, inspection materials

Magnetisation methods, Interpretation and evaluation of test indications, Principles and methods

of demagnetization, Residual magnetism.

UNIT III

THERMOGRAPHY AND EDDY CURRENT TESTING- Principles, Contact and non


contact inspection methods, Techniques for applying liquid crystals, Advantages and limitation –

infrared radiation and infrared detectors, Instrumentations and methods, applications. Eddy

Current Testing-Generation of eddy currents, Properties of eddy currents, Eddy current sensing

elements, Probes, Instrumentation, Types of arrangement, Applications, advantages, Limitations,

Interpretation/Evaluation.

UNIT IV

ULTRASONIC TESTING AND ACOUSTIC EMISSION - Ultrasonic Testing-Principle,

Transducers, transmission and pulse-echo method, straight beam and angle beam,

instrumentation, data representation, A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Phased Array Ultrasound, Time of

Flight Diffraction. Acoustic Emission Technique ¡VPrinciple, AE parameters, Applications

UNIT V

RADIOGRAPHY - Principle, interaction of X-Ray with matter, imaging, film and film less

techniques, types and use of filters and screens, geometric factors, Inverse square, law,

characteristics of films – graininess, density, speed, contrast, characteristic curves,

Penetrameters, Exposure charts, Radiographic equivalence. Fluoroscopy- Xero-Radiography,

Computed Radiography, Computed Tomography

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Baldev Raj, T.Jayakumar, M.Thavasimuthu ¡§Practical Non-Destructive Testing¡¨, Narosa

Publishing House, 2009.

2. Ravi Prakash, ¡§Non-Destructive Testing Techniques¡¨, 1st revised edition, New Age

International Publishers, 2010

REFERENCES: 1. ASM Metals Handbook,¡¨Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control¡¨, American

Society of Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 200, Volume-17.

2. Paul E Mix,Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide¡¨, Wiley, 2nd Edition

New Jersey, 2005

3. Charles, J. HellierHandbook of Non-destructive evaluation¡¨, McGraw Hill, New York 2001.

13.8 COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning Outcomes

S.N

O

LH

CT

UR

E

NO

TOPICS TO

BE

COVERED

SESSION

OBJECTIVE

BLOOMS

LHVEL

TEACHIN

G

METHOD

OLOGY

LINK


1. LH

1

Overview of

NDT

1.By the end of the

session students will

have an Overview of

NDT

Analyze

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=tlE3e

K0g6vU

2. LH2

NDT Versus

Mechanical

testing

1.By the end of the


learn about various

mechanical testing

methods

Analyze

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=0WM

WUP5ZHSY

3. LH3

Overview of

the Non

Destructive

Testing

Methods for

the detection

of

manufacturin

g

1.By the end of the


Learn about the

detection of

manufacturing

Analyze

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=0WM

WUP5ZHSY

4. LH4

defects as

well as

material

characterizati

on

1.By the end of the


describe general

defects as well as

material characterization

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=0WM

WUP5ZHSY

5. LH5

Relative

merits

1. By the end of the


define Relative merits .

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=EJoU

QP-

5g7g&list=PL

bMVogVj5nJ

RbajyOAp_G

HxTW9tQEq

d0W

6. LH6 limitations,

1.By the end of the


Learn about limitations

of ndt

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=EJoU

QP-

5g7g&list=PL

bMVogVj5nJ

RbajyOAp_G

HxTW9tQEq

d0W


7. LH7

various

physical

characteristic

s of materials

1.By the end of the


recognize various

physical characteristics

of materials

Analyze

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=EJoU

QP-

5g7g&list=PL

bMVogVj5nJ

RbajyOAp_G

HxTW9tQEq

d0W

8. LH8

applications

in NDT

1.By the end of the


describe about

applications in NDT

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=qpgc

D5k1494

9. LH9

Visual

inspection

1.By the end of the


explain about Visual

inspection method

Evaluate Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=qpgc

D5k1494

10. LH

1

SURFACE

NDE

METHODSL

iquid

Penetrant

Testing

1.By the end of the


explain about

SURFACE NDE

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=UM6

XKvXWVFA

&t=279s

11. LH2

Principles,

types and

properties of

liquid

penetrants

developers



Learn about Principles,

types and properties of

liquid penetrants

developers

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=UM6

XKvXWVFA

&t=279s

12. LH3

advantages

and

limitations of

various

methods

1.By the end of the


Learn about

advantages and

limitations of various

methods

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=AvNg

x0WFH1Y

13. LH4

Testing

Procedure,

Interpretation

of results

1.By the end of the


explain design new

Testing Procedure

Apply Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=AvNg

x0WFH1Y

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UM6XKvXWVFA&t=279s





https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AvNgx0WFH1Y









14. LH5

Magnetic

Particle

Testing-

Theory of

magnetism

By the end of the


discuss about Magnetic

Particle Testing- Theory

of magnetism

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=93sR

ATwdHo4

15. LH6

inspection

materials

Magnetisatio

n methods

By the end of the


discuss about

inspection materials

Magnetisation methods

Analyze

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=93sR

ATwdHo4

16. LH7

Interpretation

and

evaluation of

test

indications

By the end of the


analyze about test

indications

Analyze

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=93sR

ATwdHo4

17. LH8

, Principles

and methods

of

demagnetizat

ion



analyze methods of

demagnetization

Analyze

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=93sR

ATwdHo4

18. LH9

Residual

magnetism.

1.By the end of the


Learn how Residual

magnetism will work

Understand

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=FvTm

eeODrKQ

19. LH

1

thermograph

y and eddy

current

testing-

Principles

1.By the end of the


Learn how

thermography and eddy

current testing-

Principles

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=9TCK

1Sa0_Vc

20. LH2

, Contact and

non contact

inspection

methods

By the end of the


analyze difference

between Contact and

non contact inspection

methods

Analyze

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=9TCK

1Sa0_Vc

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=93sRATwdHo4
















https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FvTmeeODrKQ




https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9TCK1Sa0_Vc









21. LH3

Techniques

for applying

liquid

crystals

By the end of the


develop Techniques for

applying liquid crystals

Analyze Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=ckUJ

LjXa8aY

22. LH4

Advantages

and

limitation –

infrared

radiation and

infrared

detectors

By the end of the


analyze limitation of

infrared radiation and

infrared detectors

Analyze

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=ckUJ

LjXa8aY

23. LH5

Instrumentati

ons and

methods,

applications

1.By the end of the


Learn about

Instrumentations and its

methods

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=ckUJ

LjXa8aY

24. LH6

Eddy Current

Testing-

Generation

of eddy

currents

By the end of the


analyze about Eddy

Current Testing-

Generation

Analyze Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=oriFJ

Byl6Hs

25. LH7

Properties of

eddy currents

1.By the end of the


Learn about Properties

of eddy currents

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=oriFJ

Byl6Hs

26. LH8

Eddy current

sensing

elements

1.By the end of the


define about Eddy

current sensing elements

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=oriFJ

Byl6Hs

27. LH9

Probes,

Instrumentati

on

1.By the end of the


Learn about Probes,

Instrumentation

Understand

Analyze Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/re

sults?search_

query=Probes

%2C+Instrum

entation

28. LH1

0

Types of

arrangement

Applications,

1.By the end of the


Learn about

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/re

sults?search_

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ckUJLjXa8aY












https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oriFJByl6Hs












https://www.youtube.com/results?search_query=Probes%2C+Instrumentation










advantages,

Limitations,

Interpretation

/Evaluation

applications,

advantages, Limitations,

Interpretation/Evaluatio

n

query=Probes

%2C+Instrum

entation

29. LH

1

ultrasonic

testing and

acoustic

emission

1.By the end of the


recognize Functions of

ultrasonic testing and

acoustic emission

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=uqdW

25EpzXw

30. LH2

Ultrasonic

Testing-

Principle

1.By the end of the


Learn about Ultrasonic

Testing-Principle

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=uqdW

25EpzXw

31. LH3

Transducers,

transmission

and pulse-

echo method

1.By the end of the


Learn about

transmission and pulse-

echo method

Analyze

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=lqmg

VQyAMwA

32. LH4

straight beam

and angle

beam

By the end of the


Analyze straight beam

and angle beam

Understand

Analyze

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=lqmg

VQyAMwA

33. LH5

instrumentati

on, data

representatio

n

By the end of the


Learn about

instrumentation, data

representation

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=lqmg

VQyAMwA

34. LH6

A/Scan, B-

scan, C-scan

1.By the end of the


learn about A/Scan, B-

scan, C-scan

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=gJaFv

oNdNuo

35. LH7

Phased Array

Ultrasound

1.By the end of the


Learn about Phased

Array Ultrasound

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=gJaFv

oNdNuo

36. LH8

Time of

Flight

Diffraction

1.By the end of the


Learn define Time of

Flight Diffraction

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=9YXy

T9GcDKY

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uqdW25EpzXw








https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lqmgVQyAMwA












https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gJaFvoNdNuo








https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9YXyT9GcDKY





37. LH9

Acoustic

Emission

Technique

By the end of the

session students will use

Acoustic Emission

Technique

Apply Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=o-

cqEETMWP8

38. LH1

0 ¡VPrinciple

By the end of the


specify ¡VPrinciple

Apply

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=o-

cqEETMWP8

39. LH1

1

AE

parameters

By the end of the


determine AE

parameters

Evaluate Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=WAh-

YeGnECg

40. LH1

2

Applications

1.By the end of the


Learn about

Applications

Understand

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=WAh-

YeGnECg

41. LH

1

RADIOGRA

PHY

1.By the end of the


estimate Scope of

RADIOGRAPHY

Evaluate

Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=WAh-

YeGnECg

42. LH2

Principle,

interaction of

X-Ray with

matter

By the end of the


determine Principle,

interaction of X-Ray

with matter

Understand

Evaluate Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=d3n-

kFMAtns

43. LH3

imaging, film

and film less

techniques

By the end of the


summarize about

imaging, film and film

less techniques

Create Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=d3n-

kFMAtns

44. LH4

types and use

of filters and

screens

By the end of the


determine types and

use of filters and screens

Evaluate Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=GgZ1

nJH7hWU

45. LH5

geometric

factors

By the end of the


specify geometric

factors

Evaluate Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=GgZ1

nJH7hWU

46. LH6

Inverse

square, law

By the end of the


determine about

Inverse square, law

Evaluate Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=KAR

COGT95W0

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o-cqEETMWP8








https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=WAh-YeGnECg












https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d3n-kFMAtns








https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GgZ1nJH7hWU








https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KARCOGT95W0





T1. ASM Metals Handbook,¡¨Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control¡¨, American

Society of Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 200, Volume-17.

.

T2. Paul E Mix,Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide¡¨, Wiley, 2nd Edition

New Jersey, 2005.

R1. Charles, J. HellierHandbook of Non-destructive evaluation¡¨, McGraw Hill, New York 2001

11.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Objective Program Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J k L M N

I H S H S H S S H

II H H S S H S S S

47. LH7

characteristic

s of films –

graininess,

density,

speed,

contrast

By the end of the


determine

characteristics of films –

graininess, density,

speed, contrast

Understand

Evaluate Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=TN_S

KG89RVU

48. LH8

characteristic

curves

By the end of the


demonstrate

characteristic curves

Apply Talk &

chalk

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=TN_S

KG89RVU

49. LH9

Penetrameter

s Exposure

charts,

Radiographic

equivalence

By the end of the


summarize Factors

affecting Penetrameters

Exposure charts

Create

Create

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=TN_S

KG89RVU

50. LH1

0

Fluoroscopy-

Xero-

Radiography,

Computed

Radiography,

Computed

Tomography

By the end of the


summarize about

Fluoroscopy- Xero-

Radiography, Computed

Radiography, Computed

Tomography

Create

Create

https://www.y

outube.com/w

atch?v=IcWjZ

bXiFkM

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TN_SKG89RVU












https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IcWjZbXiFkM





III H H S S S H

IV S S S H H S S

V H H S S S S H H H S

VI H S H S H S S H H


11.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Outcomes Program Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J k L M N

a S S H S S H S

b S S H S S S S H

c H H S S

d S H S S H

e H H S S H H S

f H H S S S H H H


13.12 OBJECTIVE :

QUESTIONS

UNIT-1

1. Liquid penetrant testing is based on the principle of: ( a)

(a) Polarized sound waves in a liquid

(b) Magnetic domains

(c) Absorption of X rays

(d) Capillary action

2. When a small diameter tube is placed in a glass of water, water rises in the tube to a level

above the adjacent surface. This is called: ( c )

(a) Viscosity

(b) Capillary action

(c) Surface tension

(d) Barometric testing


3. How is the size of a liquid penetrant indication usually related to the discontinuity it

represents: (d )

(a) Larger than

(b) Smaller than(

c) Equal to

(d) Not related to

4. A penetrant that is self-emulsifying is called: (c)

(a) Solvent removable

(b) Water washable

(c) Post-emulsified

(d) Dual sensitivity method 2

5. A penetrant process which employs an emulsifier as a separate step in the penetrant removal

process is called: ( d )


(b) Water washable

(c) Post-emulsified

(d) Dual sensitivity method

6. A penetrant process in which excess penetrant is removed with an organic solvent is called: (a)


(b) Water washable

(c) Post-emulsified

(d) Dual method

7. Which of the following statements accurately describes the capabilities of liquid penetrant

testing? ( a)

(a) Liquid penetrant testing is useful for locating subsurface discontinuities in a test piece

(b) Liquid penetrant testing is useful for locating discontinuities in porous materials

(c) Liquid penetrant testing is useful for locating discontinuities which are open to the surface in

non-porous materials

(d) none of the above

8. Which of the following discontinuity types could typically be found with a liquid penetrant

test? (b)

(a) Internal slag in a weld

(b) Internal slag in a casting

(c) Sensitization in austenitic stainless steel

(d) Fatigue cracks 3

9. Which of the following chemical elements are normally held to a minimum in liquid penetrant

materials, when testing stainless steel and titanium? (b)

(a) Hydrogen

(b) Chlorine

(c) Carbon

(d) Oil


10. Which of the following chemical elements are normally held to a minimum in liquid

penetrant materials when testing nickel based alloys? (c )

(a) Sulphur

(b) Oxygen

(c) Carbon

(d) Nitrogen

11. Which of the following is the most desirable method of pre-cleaning a test piece prior to

penetrant testing? ( d)

(a) Sand blasting

(b) Vapour degreasing

(c) Emery cloth

(d) Wire brushing

12. Which of the following pre-cleaning processes is not recommended? a

(a) Detergent cleaning


(c) Shot blasting

(d) Ultrasonic cleaning

13. A wire brush should be used for pre-cleaning: d

(a) When grease and oil must be removed

(b) Only as a last resort

(c) When rust is to be removed

(d) When grinding burrs must be removed 4

14. A hydrometer is used to measure:b

(a) Penetrant viscosity

(b) Specific gravity of water based wet developers

(c) Penetrant specific gravity

(d) Cleaner specific gravity

15. Visible, solvent removable penetrants are most advantageous for: d

(a) Inspecting parts with rough surfaces

(b) Inspecting batches of small parts

(c) Inspecting parts at remote locations

(d) Inspecting parts with porous surfaces

16. For adequate test results, the black light used in fluorescent penetrant examination should

provide what minimum black light intensity at the test surface?c

(a) 100 foot candles per square centimetre

(b) 1000 microwatts per square centimeter

(c) 800 foot candles

(d) 35 microwatts per square centimeter


17. What minimum warm-up time is required for acceptable performance of a mercury Vapour

arc black light?a

(a) None

(b) 2 minutes

(c) 5 minutes

(d) 10 minutes

18. Which of the following penetrants contains an emulsifying agent?b


(b) Water washable

(c) Post emulsifiable

(d) Fluorescent 5

19. Which of the following penetrants must be treated with an emulsifier prior to water

removal?c


(b) Water washable


(d) Fluorescent

20. What is the function of an emulsifier?b

(a) To remove the excess penetrant

(b) To develop indications with a post emulsifiable penetrant system

(c) To assist penetration with a post emulsifiable penetrant system

(d) To make a post emulsifiable penetrant water washable

UNIT-2

1. An oil based emulsifier is called: b

(a) Hydrophilic

(b) Hydrophobic

(c) Lipophilic

(d) Fluoroscopic

2. A water based emulsifier is called: c

(a) Hydrophilic

(b) Hydrophobic


(c) Lipophilic

(d) Fluoroscopic

3. Methylene chloride, isopropyl, alcohol, naptha and mineral spirits are examples of: a

(a) Emulsifiers

(b) Developers

(c) Solvent removers

(d) None of the above

4. What type of solvent removers may be used with a solvent removable penetrant? d

(a) Any organic solvent

(b) Only the cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the penetrant

(c) Any alcohol based solvents

(d) Only chlorinated hydrocarbons

5. Which of the following is a prerequisite for a penetrant test?d

(a) Developer must be applied in a thin, even coat

(b) Any surface coatings or soils must be completely removed

(c) All traces of penetrant materials should be removed after testing is complete

(d) The test object must be non-magnetic

6. Which of the following types of pre-cleaning processes may be used for liquid penetrant

testing? c

(a) Wire brushing only

(b) Detergent and water only

(c) Vapour degreasing only

(d) Any process that leaves the part clean and dry, does not harm the part and is compatible with

the penetrant materials

7. What is the likely result of incomplete removal of all excess penetrant from the test piece

surface?a

(a) Formation of false indications

(b) Formation of relevant indications

(c) Exaggeration of the size of relevant indications


8. What is the preferred pre-cleaning process for removal of oil and grease : d

(a) Steam cleaning with a added acid


(c) Steam cleaning


9. Which pre-cleaning method may be used with either a solvent or a detergent solution?c

(a) Ultrasonic cleaning

(b) Steam cleaning

(c) Detergent wash


(d) Vapour degreasing

10. What is the danger associated with using a wire brush during pre-cleaning?d

(a) Bristles from the wire brush may cause false indications

(b) Contaminants from the wire brush may cause delayed hydrogen cracking of high carbon

steels

(c) The wire brush may not adequately remove organic soils

(d) The wire brush may close or smear metal over

11. What is the preferred method of removing paint prior to performing a penetrant testing?b

(a) Sand blast

(b) Chemical removers

(c) Power wire brush

(d) Shot blast

12. What additional surface preparation or cleaning must be performed on a machined or ground

aluminium casting prior to penetrant testing? b

(a) Vapour degreasing

(b) Etching

(c) Detergent wash

(d) Nothing

13. Acceptable methods of penetrant application are:b

(a) Spraying

(b) Dipping

(c) Brushing

(d) All of the above

14. The time period during which penetrant remains on the surface of the test piece is called: d

(a) Dwell time

(b) Soaking time

(c) Fixing time

(d) Development time

15. Excess penetrant removal is a two step process with which of the following penetrant

methods?a

(a) Water washable

(b) Post emulsifiable

(c) Solvent removable

(d) Liquid oxygen applications

16. A developer aids penetrant bleed out because of: c

(a) Adequate removal of the excess penetrant

(b) Providing a contrasting background for visible dye indications

(c) Capillary action

(d) Proper emulsifier action


17. In the solvent removable penetrant process, excess penetrant is removed with: a

(a) A water spray

(b) A hydrophilic scrubber

(c) A solvent spray

(d) Clean, lint free towels slightly moistened with solvent

18. Water based wet developer is applied: b

(a) Immediately before removal of excess penetrant

(b) Immediately after removal of excess penetrant

(c) After a drying period following removal of excess penetrant

(d) For maximum sensitivity results

19. Non-aqueous wet developer is applied: a



(c) After the excess penetrant is removed and part surface is dried


20. Dry developer is applied: b



(c) After drying of the part


UNIT-3

1. An oil based emulsifier is called: b

(a) Hydrophilic

(b) Hydrophobic

(c) Lipophilic

(d) Fluoroscopic

2. A water based emulsifier is called:c

(a) Hydrophilic

(b) Hydrophobic

(c) Lipophilic

(d) Fluoroscopic

3. Methylene chloride, isopropyl, alcohol, naptha and mineral spirits are examples of:b

(a) Emulsifiers

(b) Developers

(c) Solvent removers


4. What type of solvent removers may be used with a solvent removable penetrant? d


(a) Any organic solvent

(b) Only the cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the penetrant

(c) Any alcohol based solvents

(d) Only chlorinated hydrocarbons

5. Which of the following is a prerequisite for a penetrant test? b

(a) Developer must be applied in a thin, even coat

(b) Any surface coatings or soils must be completely removed

(c) All traces of penetrant materials should be removed after testing is complete

(d) The test object must be non-magnetic

6. Which of the following types of pre-cleaning processes may be used for liquid penetrant

testing? d

(a) Wire brushing only

(b) Detergent and water only

(c) Vapour degreasing only

(d) Any process that leaves the part clean and dry, does not harm the part and is compatible with

the penetrant materials

7. What is the likely result of incomplete removal of all excess penetrant from the test piece

surface? C

(a) Formation of false indications

(b) Formation of relevant indications

(c) Exaggeration of the size of relevant indications


8. What is the preferred pre-cleaning process for removal of oil and grease : a

(a) Steam cleaning with a added acid


(c) Steam cleaning


9. Which pre-cleaning method may be used with either a solvent or a detergent solution?b

(a) Ultrasonic cleaning

(b) Steam cleaning

(c) Detergent wash

(d) Vapour degreasing

10. What is the danger associated with using a wire brush during pre-cleaning? c

(a) Bristles from the wire brush may cause false indications

(b) Contaminants from the wire brush may cause delayed hydrogen cracking of high carbon

steels

(c) The wire brush may not adequately remove organic soils

(d) The wire brush may close or smear metal over

11. What is the preferred method of removing paint prior to performing a penetrant testing? a


(a) Sand blast

(b) Chemical removers

(c) Power wire brush

(d) Shot blast

12. What additional surface preparation or cleaning must be performed on a machined or ground

aluminium casting prior to penetrant testing?c

(a) Vapour degreasing

(b) Etching

(c) Detergent wash

(d) Nothing

13. Acceptable methods of penetrant application are:b

(a) Spraying

(b) Dipping

(c) Brushing


14. The time period during which penetrant remains on the surface of the test piece is called: d

(a) Dwell time

(b) Soaking time

(c) Fixing time

(d) Development time

15. Excess penetrant removal is a two step process with which of the following penetrant

methods?b

(a) Water washable

(b) Post emulsifiable

(c) Solvent removable

(d) Liquid oxygen applications

16. A developer aids penetrant bleed out because of:a

(a) Adequate removal of the excess penetrant

(b) Providing a contrasting background for visible dye indications

(c) Capillary action

(d) Proper emulsifier action

17. In the solvent removable penetrant process, excess penetrant is removed with:b

(a) A water spray

(b) A hydrophilic scrubber

(c) A solvent spray

(d) Clean, lint free towels slightly moistened with solvent

18. Water based wet developer is applied: d




(c) After a drying period following removal of excess penetrant


19. Non-aqueous wet developer is applied:b



(c) After the excess penetrant is removed and part surface is dried


20. Dry developer is applied:b



(c) After drying of the part


UNIT-4

1. The temperature of water rinse used in the water washable penetrant process should be:a

(a) 60 to 110o C

(b) 40 to 100o C

(c) 16 to 43o C

(d) 70 to 140o C

2. The danger of over washing during a water washable penetrant test is that: c

(a) Excess penetrant will be removed from the test piece

(b) Penetrant will be removed from discontinuities

(c) The waste water will contain too high a concentration of penetrants

(d) A protective oxide coating on the test piece is formed

3. Which penetrant process is best suited to high production rates of many small parts?c


(b) Water washable


(d) Fluorescent 14

4. Which penetrant process is best suited to detect shallow discontinuities?a


(b) Water washable


(d) Fluorescent

5. Which penetrant process is best suited to the detection of discontinuities in a test piece having

threads and keyways?d


(b) Water washable



(d) Fluorescent

6. Which penetrant process is the most sensitive to detect fine discontinuities? b


(b) Water washable

(c) Post emulsifiable fluorescent

(d) Water washable fluorescent

7. Which penetrant process is best suited for portable application in the field?a


(b) Water washable


(d) Fluorescent

8. Which penetrant process should be used if repeated examinations are anticipated? d


(b) Water washable


(d) Fluorescent 15

9. What is a disadvantage of using the fluorescent penetrant process?b

(a) Lower visibility of indications

(b) Must be performed in a darkened area with aid of a UV lamp

(c) Easily washed with water

(d) High visibility of indications

10. Which of the following developers is applied by brush, spraying or dipping? d

(a) Non-aqueous wet

(b) Water based wet

(c) Dry

(d) Dual sensitivity

11. Which of the following developers is applied by spray only?c

(a) Non-aqueous wet

(b) Water based wet

(c) Dry


12. Which of the following developers is applied by immersion or flow on only?a

(a) Non-aqueous wet

(b) Water based wet

(c) Dry


13. What is the minimum time considered necessary for dark adaptation of the eyes prior to

evaluating the results of a fluorescent penetrant test?d


(a) 1 minute

(b) 2 minutes

(c) 5 minutes

(d) 10 minutes 16

14. What is the likely result of looking directly into a black light?b

(a) Burning of the retina of the eye

(b) Temporary inflammation of the cornea

(c) Long term tendency toward formation of cataracts

(d) Fluorescence of the fluid in the eye

5. Which type of penetrant process would be best suited to the detection of wide, shallow

discontinuities?d


(b) Water washable


(d) Fluorescent

16. Which type of penetrant process affords most control of test sensitivity level? d


(b) Water washable


(d) Fluorescent

17. Which type of penetrant process is least susceptible to over washing?a


(b) Water washable


(d) Fluorescent

18. What is a disadvantage of the solvent removable penetrant process?

(a) It is the least sensitive of the penetrant processes

(b) It is not well suited for use on rough surfaces

(c) It is highly portable

(d) No water is required for its use

19. Which of the following is the proper first step in removal of excess penetrant when using the

solvent removable penetrant process?

(a) Immerse the test piece in solvent

(b) Spray the test piece with water

(c) Wipe the test piece surface with clean, lint free towels slightly moistened

(d) All of the above is correct

20 Which type of penetrant process is least susceptible to over washing?a


(b) Water washable



(d) Fluorescent

UNIT-5

1. Which of the following types of penetrants, developers, solvents are used when

conducting a liquid penetrant test on a part that is exposed to a liquid oxygen

environment.

(a) Water based penetrants

(b) Water based developers

(c) Water based solvents


2. The causes of non relevant indications are:

(a) Insufficient removal of excess surface penetrant

(b) Penetrant on operators hands

(c) Threads, keyways, splines, sharp corners, press fits, blind holes, rough surfaces

(d) Contaminated work surfaces

3. Which of the following metals must be tested with low halogen sulphur free penetrant

materials: (a) Copper, silver, gold

(b) Nickel based alloys, certain stainless steel materials

(c) Steel, iron, aluminium

(d) Plastic, wood, paper

4. Liquid penetrants can be further categorised by the removal method of excess surface

penetrant:

(a) Water washable

(b) Solvent removable

(c) Post emulsified


5. The typical temperature ranges for conducting a liquid penetrant test is:

(a) 60 to 100ºC

(b) 10 to 60ºF

(c) 16 to 52ºC

(d) 10 to 20ºK

6. Surface breaking porosity will show what type of relevant indications when a welded

aluminium plate is tested with the liquid penetrant method:

(a) Linear indications

(b) Square indications

(c) Triangular indications

(d) Rounded indications 19


7. Cracks, lack of penetration, lack of fusion which are surface breaking on a welded aluminium

plate which has been liquid penetrant tested will show as:

(a) Linear indications

(b) Rounded indications

(c) Square indications

(d) Triangular indications

8. Which of the following methods is not recommended for pre-cleaning prior to a liquid

penetrant test:

(a) Steam cleaning, etching, rust and paint removal

(b) Solvent wipe, vapour degreasing, ultrasonic bath cleaning

(c) Blasting, grinding, filing, honing, machining

(d) All of the listed methods are not recommended

9. The purpose of using a developer is:

(a) To create a contrasting background for the penetrants to ensure better visibility of indications

(b) Assists in reverse capillary action due to absorption ability of developers

(c) Prevent the part from corroding after the liquid penetrant test

(d) To ensure that the part has been correctly heat treated

(e) Both a and b are correct 20

10. The typical sequence of conducting a visible solvent removable penetrant is:

(a) Pre-clean with a solvent wipe method

(b) Apply visible penetrant, keep wet, dwell time of 2 minutes

(c) Pour solvent on surface of part and wipe with waste cloth

(d) Spray on a thick layer of developer

11. The principle on which liquid penetrant testing is based on is:

(a) Capillary action of the penetrant

(b) Capillary action of cleaner/solvent

(c) Capillary action of developer

(d) None of the listed is correct

12. The limitation of a liquid penetrant test is:

(a) Only surface breaking discontinuities can be detected if chemically and physically clean and

dry

(b) Porous materials cannot be tested

(c) There is cleaning problem following penetrant inspection in some cases

(d) All of the listed limitations are correct

13. Which of the following is a reason to post clean a part after a liquid penetrant test:

(a) The part might be further processed

(b) If repairs are necessary

(c) Developers absorb moisture and may result in part being corroded

(d) All of the reasons are correct

14. Which of the following penetrant has a built-in emulsifier

(a) Water washable

(b) Solvent removable


(c) Post emulsified

(d) All of the listed above

15. Liquid penetrants can be classified into the types of dyes they contain:

(a) Visible/colour contrast

(b) Fluorescent

(c) Dual sensitivity

(d) All of the listed is correct

16. The advantages of using a visible solvent removable penetrant versus a post emulsified

fluorescent penetrant is:

(a) No UV light is needed

(b) The technique is well suitable for site tests or spot checks

(c) No water or emulsifiers are needed

(d) No extra equipment is needed

(e) All of the advantages listed above are correct

17. The following precautions must be observed when removing the excess surface penetrant

with a water wash method using a hose pipe:

(a) The wash angle should be at 45o

(b) A coarse droplet spray

(c) Temperature of water 16 to 43o C

(d) Pressure as low as possible not to exceed 50 psi

(e) All of the precautions listed above are correct 23

18. The typical sequence of conducting a visible solvent removable penetrant is:

(a) Pre-clean with a solvent wipe method

(b) Apply visible penetrant, keep wet, dwell time of 2 minutes

(c) Pour solvent on surface of part and wipe with waste cloth

(d) Spray on a thick layer of developer

19. The principle on which liquid penetrant testing is based on is:

(a) Capillary action of the penetrant

(b) Capillary action of cleaner/solvent

(c) Capillary action of developer

(d) None of the listed is correct

20. The limitation of a liquid penetrant test is:

(a) Only surface breaking discontinuities can be detected if chemically and physically clean and

dry

(b) Porous materials cannot be tested

(c) There is cleaning problem following penetrant inspection in some cases

(d) All of the listed limitations are correct

13. 13 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS (TOTAL 5 UNITS)

Sl.No. Questions Blooms Course


UNIT 1 Taxonomy

Level

Outcome

UNIT-I


1 Define Mechanical testing Knowledge a

2 Explain NDT Versus Mechanical testing, Understand a

3 Define Non Destructive Testing Knowledge a

4 Define manufacturing defects Knowledge a

5 Explain merits and limitations Understand a

6 Demonstrate Visual inspection Apply a

7 Differentiate NDT Versus Mechanical testing Analyze a

8 Discuss materials and their applications Understand a

9 Discuss characteristics of materials and their applications in

NDT Understand a

10 Explain applications in NDT Understand a

Sl.No Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II


1 Define Liquid Penetrant Testing Remember b

2 Explain liquid penetrants Understand c

3 Briefly explain advantages and limitations of various

methods, Evaluate c

4 Define Magnetic Particle Testing Remember b

5 Define Residual magnetism Remember b

6 Outline Principles and methods of demagnetization Analyze c

7 Define Magnetisation methods Remember c

8 Discuss inspection materials Understand b

9 Outline Theory of magnetism Analyze c

10 Discuss limitations of various methods Understand b

UNIT-II


1 Explain Ultrasonic testing for roughness of the surfaces. Create b

2 Explain the principle and application of Eddy Current

Testing Analyze c

3 State the concept for the applications of plane and

circularly polarisation of waves for NDT. Apply c

4 What are the prime advantages of Radiographic Create b


Examination during NDT?

5 Explain the Fluroescent Penetration NDT examination

method Evaluate b

6 Explain the procedure of visual inspection test. -Ray

radiographic techniques Analyze c

7 Explain in detail the magnetic particle inspection

technique with the help of neat and suitable sketches Evaluate c

8 Discuss the working principle of Xero-Radiograogy. Create b

9 Differentiate between through transmission and pulse-

echo methods of ultrasonic inspection. Create c

10 What is the equation for sound waves in a material? Create b

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III


1 Discuss Contact and non contact inspection Understand d

2 Define liquid crystals Remember d

3 Determine Eddy Current Testing Evaluate d

4 Differentiate 聽infrared radiation and infrared detectors Analyze d

5 Explain Eddy current sensing elements Understand d

6 Discuss Generation of eddy currents Understand d

7 Discuss Properties of eddy currents Create d

8 Discuss infrared radiation Create d

9 Explain聽 infrared detector Create d

10 explain Types of arrangement Create d

UNIT-III

Tutorials Long聽 Answer Questions

1 Explain standard depth of penetration in Eddy current

testing? Create d

2 Explain the sequence of operation of penetrant testing. Create d

3 Explain the principle of Eddy current testing. Create d

4 Explain demagnetization in Magnetic particle testing? Create d

5 How does the ultrasonic frequency affect the penetration

and resolution? Create

d

6 Explain thermography techniques. Mention some

application in NDT Analyze

d

7 Explain briefly the possible NDT techniques for their Create d


detection.

8 Differentiate between X-Ray and聽聽 What are the

limitations of ultrasonic inspection? Remember

d

9 Write short notes on : a) Sperry detector b) Applications

of Photoelasticity Evaluate

d

10 Explain magnetization of a specimen using an

electromagnet Analyze

d

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV


1 Define Ultrasonic Testing- Remember e

2 Explain transmission and pulse-echo method Create e

3 Discuss straight beam and angle beam Understand e

4 Define Diffraction Remember e

5 Classify A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Apply e

6 Define Acoustic Emission Technique Remember e

7 Define AE parameters Remember e

8 Explain V Principle Understand e

9 Discuss Phased Array Ultrasound Understand e

10 Describe data representation Remember e

UNIT-IV


1 What are the basic factors affecting the thermal

measurements? Evaluate e

2 Explain shear waves in ultrasonic testing? What are its

limitations? Analyze e

3 Compare destructive and non-destructive testing. Evaluate e

4 Explain demagnetization in Magnetic particle testing?

How do you ensure it? Analyze e


and resolution? Evaluate e

6 Explain the double wall single image technique used in

Radiographic testing. Analyze e


application in NDT Apply e


Radiographic testing Remember e


9 Mention the properties of X and gamma rays. Create e

10 Describe characteristic of ultrasonic beam Evaluate e

Sl.No Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V


1 Estimate interaction of X-Ray with matter Understand f

2 Determine film and film less techniques Evaluate f

3 Determine types and use of filters and screens Evaluate f

4 Discuss Inverse square law Understand f

5 Define characteristics of films Remember f

6 Describe Xero-Radiography Remember f

7 Define Radiographic equivalence Remember f

8 Define Penetrameters Remember f

9 Describe Computed Radiography Remember f

10 Discuss Exposure charts Understand F

UNIT-V


1 What is a Holograph? How can it be used in NDT? Evaluate f

2 Describe characteristic of ultrasonic beam Create f

3 Explain the need and significance of NDT in the light of

the statement that the destructive testing can completely Create

f

4 explain the surface and bulk property of the metals Understand f

5 State the possible defects on its surface, subsurface and

bulk Evaluate

f

6 State the conditions under which nondestructive testing

methods are used Evaluate

f

7 What are penetrametres in radiographic testing? Mention

uses Analyze

f

8 What are the basic ways to control the radiation exposure

when working with radiographic source? Apply

f

9 Compare destructive and non-destructive testing. Apply f

10 What is the role of surface preparation for magna flux

NDT method? Remember

f

11. 14 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

Sl. Questions Blooms Course


No Taxonomy

Level

Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignment short Answer Questions

1 Define Mechanical testing Remember a

2 Explain NDT Versus Mechanical testing, Evaluate a

3 Define Non Destructive Testing Remember a

4 Define manufacturing defects Remember a

5 Explain merits and limitations Evaluate a

6 Demonstrate Visual inspection Apply a

7 Differentiate NDT Versus Mechanical testing Understand a

8 Discuss materials and their applications Create a

9 Discuss characteristics of materials and their applications

in NDT Create

a

10 Explain applications in NDT Understand a

UNIT-I


1 Explain different optical aids used in visual inspection? Evaluate a

2 State the principle of leak detection techniques used in

NDT Apply

a

3 What is the principle of Liquid penetration method of

NDT? Evaluate

a

4 Enumerate the limitations of radiographic inspection. Create a

5 Explain Ultrasonic testing for roughness of the surfaces. Analyze a

6 Write a note on the importance of Eye in Visual testing. Apply a

7 Explain the sequence of operation of penetrate testing. Create a

8 Explain the principle of Eddy current testing Apply a

9 Draw line diagram and explain the principle and working

X Rays equipment. Evaluate

a

10 Write a note on measurement of moisture in wood. Apply a

Sl.

No Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II


1 Define Liquid Penetrant Testing Remember b


2 Explain liquid penetrants Remember c

3 Briefly explain advantages and limitations of various

methods, Create c

4 Define Magnetic Particle Testing Evaluate b

5 Define Residual magnetism Remember b

6 Outline Principles and methods of demagnetization Remember c

7 Define Magnetisation methods Understand c

8 Discuss inspection materials b

9 Outline Theory of magnetism Create c

10 Discuss limitations of various methods Analyze b

UNIT-II


UNIT-II


1 Explain Ultrasonic testing for roughness of the surfaces. Create b

2 Explain the principle and application of Eddy Current

Testing Evaluate c

3 State the concept for the applications of plane and

circularly polarisation of waves for NDT. Create c

4 What are the prime advantages of Radiographic

Examination during NDT? Analyze b

5 Explain the Fluroescent Penetration NDT examination

method Evaluate b

6 Explain the procedure of visual inspection test. -Ray

radiographic techniques Create c

7 Explain in detail the magnetic particle inspection

technique with the help of neat and suitable sketches Evaluate c

8 Discuss the working principle of Xero-Radiograogy. Create b

9 Differentiate between through transmission and pulse-

echo methods of ultrasonic inspection. Create c

10 What is the equation for sound waves in a material? Create b

Sl.

No Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignment short聽 Answer Questions

1 Discuss Contact and non contact inspection Remember d

2 Define liquid crystals Remember d

3 Determine Eddy Current Testing Understand d

4 Differentiate 聽infrared radiation and infrared detectors Understand d

5 Explain Eddy current sensing elements Create d


6 Discuss Generation of eddy currents Create d

7 Discuss Properties of eddy currents Remember d

8 Discuss infrared radiation Remember d

9 Explain聽 infrared detector Analyze d

10 explain Types of arrangement Understand d

UNIT-III

Assignment Long聽 Answer Questions

1 Explain standard depth of penetration in Eddy current

testing? Create d

2 Explain the sequence of operation of penetrant testing. Evaluate d

3 Explain the principle of Eddy current testing. Create d

4 Explain demagnetization in Magnetic particle testing? Evaluate d


and resolution? Analyze

d


application in NDT Understand

d

7 Explain briefly the possible NDT techniques for their

detection. Create

d

8 Differentiate between X-Ray and聽聽 What are the

limitations of ultrasonic inspection? Create

d

9 Write short notes on : a) Sperry detector b) Applications of

Photoelasticity Create

d

10 Explain magnetization of a specimen using an

electromagnet Create

d

Sl.

No Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV


1 Define Ultrasonic Testing- Remember e

2 Explain transmission and pulse-echo method Analyze e

3 Discuss straight beam and angle beam Create e

4 Define Diffraction Create e

5 Classify A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Understand e

6 Define Acoustic Emission Technique Analyze e

7 Define AE parameters Apply e

8 Explain V Principle Remember e

9 Discuss Phased Array Ultrasound Create e

10 Describe data representation Create e


UNIT-IV


1 What are the basic factors affecting the thermal

measurements? Create e

2 Explain shear waves in ultrasonic testing? What are its

limitations? Evaluate

e

3 Compare destructive and non-destructive testing. Create e

4 Explain demagnetization in Magnetic particle testing?

How do you ensure it? Analyze

e


and resolution? Create

e


Radiographic testing. Create

e


application in NDT Create

e


Radiographic testing Evaluate

e

9 Mention the properties of X and gamma rays. Create e

10 Describe characteristic of ultrasonic beam Create e

Sl.No Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V


1 Estimate interaction of X-Ray with matter Remember f

2 Determine film and film less techniques Analyze f

3 Determine types and use of filters and screens Create f

4 Discuss Inverse square law Create f

5 Define characteristics of films Understand f

6 Describe Xero-Radiography Remember f

7 Define Radiographic equivalence Remember f

8 Define Penetrameters Create f

9 Describe Computed Radiography Understand f

10 Discuss Exposure charts Remember f

UNIT-V


1 What is a Holograph? How can it be used in NDT? Create f


2 Describe characteristic of ultrasonic beam Evaluate f

3 Explain the need and significance of NDT in the light of

the statement that the destructive testing can completely Evaluate

f

4 explain the surface and bulk property of the metals Create f

5 State the possible defects on its surface, subsurface and

bulk Evaluate

f

6 State the conditions under which nondestructive testing

methods are used Analyze

f

7 What are penetrametres in radiographic testing? Mention

uses Create

f

8 What are the basic ways to control the radiation exposure

when working with radiographic source? Evaluate

f

9 Compare destructive and non-destructive testing. Create f

10 What is the role of surface preparation for magna flux

NDT method? Create

f



COURSE OVERVIEW:

Heat flows across temperature differences. There are three modes of heat transfer: conduction,

radiation, and convection. Conduction and radiation are fundamental physical mechanisms,

while convection is really conduction as affected by fluid flow. Conduction is an exchange of

energy by direct interaction between molecules of a substance containing temperature

differences. It occurs in gases, liquids, or solids and has a strong basis in the molecular kinetic

theory of physics.

14.2 PREREQUISITES:

14.HEAT TRANSFER LAB (A60387)

COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Title HEAT TRANSFER LAB

Course Code A60387

Regulation R 15

Course Structure

Lectures Tutorials Practicals Credits

3 2

Course Coordinator Mr. K. Sandeep Kumar,Assistant Professor

Team of Instructors Mr. K. Sandeep Kumar, Mr.Prabhu Kishore,Mr.Bridjesh.P, Mr.T.Srinu


UG 2 3 Thermodynamics, IC engines

14.3COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS:



Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests):

There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each

midterm examination consists of one paper. For

experimental results 10 marks are allocated,

Record and Observation carries 5 marks each and

5 marks for Viva voce. First midterm

examination shall be conducted for 6 experiments

of syllabus and second midterm examination shall

be conducted for another 6 experiments The total

marks secured by the student in each midterm

examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the

50

75




average of the two midterm examinations shall be

taken as the final marks secured by each

candidate.



a Understand heat transfer fundamentals and apply them to engineering problems


b Understanding practical heat transfer measurements in laboratories


c Understand compare measurements with theories.


d

Use Excel for data analyses and

engineering plots, and use word for

technical report writing

Midterm and University

examinations

e Consider experimental design issues for heat transfer laboratories




TOTAL 25


TOTAL 25


3 EXTERNAL Examination 3 hours 50

GRAND TOTAL 75

14.5 CO’s ACCORDING TO BLOOMS LEVEL (5 units according to syllabus)


1

Understand heat transfer

fundamentals, and apply them to

engineering problems.

Understand the basic laws of heat transfer, account for the consequence of heat transfer in thermal analyses of engineering systems

BL1

2

Understanding practical heat

transfer measurements in

laboratories, and compare

Analyze problems involving

steady state heat conduction in

simple geometries, develop

solutions for transient heat

BL2




measurements with theories conduction in simple

geometries.

3

Use Excel for data analyses and

engineering plots, and use word for

technical report writing

Obtain numerical solutions for

conduction and radiation heat

transfer problems, understand the

fundamentals of convective heat

transfer process

BL3

4

Consider experimental design issues

for heat transfer laboratories

Evaluate heat transfer coefficients for natural convection, inside ducts. Evaluate heat transfer coefficients for forced convection over exterior surfaces

BL4

Program Outcomes

Level Proficiency


A






analysis skills)

S

Solving Gate and

text book problems

Apply

B




H

Solving Gate and

text book problems

Remember

Understand

Apply retrieval skills).

C





H

Assignment & Gate

questions

Design

Create

D






S

Mini & Micro

projects

Create

E





S

Micro projects

models / Gate

questions

Analyze

Evaluate



F





N

---------

Understand

Adopt




N Micro projects

models / Gate

questions

Design

Create

H




skills).

N

Assignment & Gate

questions

Analyze

Evaluate

I

Graduates should be capable of self-education and clearly understand the value of life-long


H Class test &

seminar

Evaluate

J





awareness).

N

Seminars

Organize

K





N

Class test & Group

activity in class

room

Solve

Analyze

L








S

GATE

Develop

M








N

Text book problems

as part of

Assignments

Evaluate

Solve

N

Students will be able to work professionally

in both thermal and mechanical systems

areas.

S

Placements

Develop




14.8 SESSION PLANNER

Syllabus (Consider any 12 Experiments)

1. Composite slab apparatus – Overall heat transfer coefficient

2. Heat transfer through lagged pipe

3. Heat transfer through a concentric sphere

4. Thermal conductivity of a given metal rod

5. Heat transfer in a Pin fin

6. Experiment on transient heat conduction

7. Heat transfer in forced convection apparatus

8. Heat transfer in natural convection

9. Parallel and counter flow heat exchanger

10. Emissivity apparatus

11. Stefan Boltzman apparatus

12. Critical heat flux apparatus

13. Study of heat pipe and its demonstration

14. Film and drop wise condensation apparatus

S.NO Name of the Experiment Date Planned Date of Conducted

1 Heat transfer through composite wall

2 Heat transfer through the lagged pipe

3 Heat transfer through concentric sphere

4 Thermal conductivity of metal rod

5 Heat transfer through pin fin

6 Heat transfer in transient conduction

7 Heat transfer in forced convection

8 Heat transfer in natural convection

9 Parallel and counter flow heat exchanger

10 Emissivity apparatus

11 Stefans boltzman apparatus

12 Critical heat flux apparatus




15.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:


14.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Objectives

Program Outcomes


I S S S S S

II S S S S S

III S H S S S

IV S H H S S S

Course Outcomes

Program Outcomes


a S S S S S S

b S H S S S S

c S S S S S

d S S S



15.11 MAPPING OF BLOOMS TAXONOMY WITH COURSE OUTCOMES

Blooms

Taxonomy

1.

Remembering

/ Knowledge:

Recall or

retrieve

previous

learned

information.

Key Words:

Choose,

Define, Find,

How, Label,

List, Match,

Name, Omit,

Recall, Relate,

Select, Show,

Spell, Tell,

What, When,

Where, Which,

Who, Why

2.

Understanding /

Comprehension

:

Comprehending

the meaning,

translation,

interpolation,

and

interpretation of

instructions and

problems. State a

problem in one's

own words.

Key Words:

Classify,

Compare,

Contrast,

Demonstrate,

Explain, Extend,

Illustrate, Infer,

Interpret,

Outline, Relate,

Rephrase,

Show,

Summarize,

Translate

3. Applying /

Application:

Use a

concept in a

new situation

or

unprompted

use of an

abstraction.

Applies what

was learned

in the

classroom

into novel

situations in

the work

place.

Key Words:

Apply,

Build,

Choose,

Construct,

Develop,

Experiment,

with,

Identify,

Interview,

Make use of,

Model,

Organize,

Plan, Select,

Solve,

Utilize

4. Analyzing /

Analysis :

Separates

material or

concepts into

component

parts so that

its

organizational

structure may

be understood.

Distinguishes

between facts

and

inferences.

Key Words:

Analyze,

Assume,

Categorize,

Classify,

Compare,

Conclusion,

Contrast,

Discover,

Dissect,

Distinguish,

Divide,

Examine,

Function,

Inference,

Inspect, List,

Motive,

Relationships,

Simplify,

Survey, Take,

part, in, Test

For, Theme

5.

Evaluating /

Evaluation:

Make

judgments

about the

value of ideas

or materials.

Key Words:

Agree,

Appraise,

Assess,

Award,

Choose,

Compare,

Conclude,

Criteria,

Criticize,

Decide,

Deduct,

Defend,

Determine,

Disprove,

Estimate,

Evaluate,

Explain,

Importance,

Influence,

Interpret,

Judge,

Justify,

Mark,

Measure,

Opinion,

Perceive,

Prioritize,

Prove, Rate,

Recommend,

Rule on,

Select,

Support,

6.

Creating /

Synthesis :

Builds a

structure or

pattern

from

diverse

elements.

Put parts

together to

form a

whole,

with

emphasis

on creating

a new

meaning or

structure.

Key

Words:

Adapt,

Build,

Change,

Choose,

Combine,

Compile,

Compose,

Construct,

Create,

Delete,

Design,

Develop,

Discuss,

Elaborate,

Estimate,

Formulate,

Happen,

Imagine,

Improve,

Invent,

Course

Outcomes



value Make up,

Maximize,

Minimize,

Modify,

Original,

Originate,

Plan,

Predict,

Propose,

Solution,

Solve,

Suppose,

Test,

Theory

a.Understand

the basic

laws of heat

transfer,

account for

the

consequence

of heat

transfer in

thermal

analyses of

engineering

systems.

√

√

√

b.Analyze

problems

involving

steady state

heat

conduction in

simple

geometries,

develop

solutions for

transient heat

conduction in

simple

geometries.

√

√

c.Obtain

numerical

solutions for

conduction

and radiation

√

√ √



heat transfer

problems,

understand

the

fundamentals

of convective

heat transfer

process.

d.Evaluate

heat transfer

coefficients

for natural

convection,

inside ducts.

Evaluate heat

transfer

coefficients

for forced

convection

over exterior

surfaces.

√

√

√



The introduction of the English Language Lab is considered essential at 3rd year level. At this

stage the students need to prepare themselves for their careers which may require them to listen

to, read, speak and write in English both for their professional and interpersonal communication

in the globalised context.

15.2 PREREQUISITES:

15.3 COURSE ASSESSMENT METHODS: b) Marks Distributions (Traditional Evaluation methods)

15.ADVANCE ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB

COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Title ADVANCE ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB

Course Code A60086

Regulation R-13


-- -- 3 2

Course Coordinator N.Suravarhan

Team of Instructors N.Suravarhan,Mr.N Vishal

COURSE OVERVIEW


UG 2 3 General English Knowledge


Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests):

There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each

midterm examination consists of one paper. For

experimental results 10 marks are allocated,

Record and Observation carries 5 marks each and

5 marks for Viva voce. First midterm

examination shall be conducted for 6 experiments

of syllabus and second midterm examination shall

be conducted for another 6 experiments The total

marks secured by the student in each midterm

examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the

average of the two midterm examinations shall be

taken as the final marks secured by each

candidate.

50

75



16.5 CO’s ACCORDING TO BLOOMS LEVEL (5 units according to syllabus)



a Accomplishment of sound vocabulary and its proper use contextetually

Group Discursion

b Flair in writing and felicity in written expression

Group Discursion & Essay Writings

c Enhanced job prospects Group Discursion & Demo

d Effective speaking abilities Group Discursion & Demo




TOTAL 25


TOTAL 25


3 EXTERNAL Examination 3 hours 50

GRAND TOTAL 75


1

I.This Lab focuses on using computer-

aided multimedia instruction for

language development to meet the

following targets:

a.Accomplishment of sound

vocabulary and its proper use

contextetually

BL1

2

II.To improve the students‘ fluency in

English, through a well-developed

vocabulary and enable them

b.Flair in writing and felicity in

written expression

BL2

3

III.To listen to English spoken at

normal conversational speed by

educated English speakers

c.Enhanced job prospects

BL3

4

IV. Respond appropriately in different

socio-cultural and professional

contexts.

d.Effective speaking abilities

BL4




Program Outcomes

Level Proficiency


A






analysis skills)

S

Seminars

Understand

B




retrieval skills).

H

Communication

Skills

Apply

C





H

Group Discursion

& Demo

Create

D






S

Group Discursion

& Assignments

Create

E





S

Group Discursion

& Assignments

Analyze

Evaluate

F





S

Personality

Development Skills

Understand

Adopt




S Group Discursion,

Assignments &

Seminars

Develop

H




skills).

S

Group Discursion,

Assignments &

Seminars

Analyze

I Graduates should be capable of self-education

and clearly understand the value of life-long


H Group Discursion,

Personality

Development Skills

Develop

J





awareness).

S

Seminars

Understand

Adopt




15.7 JNTUH SYLLABUS

Introduction

The introduction of the English Language Lab is considered essential at 3rd year level. At this

stage the students need to prepare themselves for their careers which may require them to listen

to, read, speak and write in English both for their professional and interpersonal communication

in the globalised context.

K





S

Group activity in

class room

Solve

Develop

L








S

GATE

Develop

M








S

Assignments

Evaluate

Solve

N Students will be able to work professionally in both thermal and mechanical systems

areas.

S

Placements

Develop

The proposed course should be an integrated theory and lab course to enable students to use

‘good’ English and perform the following:

Gather ideas and information, to organize ideas relevantly and coherently.

Engage in debates.

Participate in group discussions.

Face interviews.

Write project/research reports/technical reports.

Make oral presentations.

Write formal letters.

Transfer information from non-verbal to verbal texts and vice versa.

To take part in social and professional communication.



Functional English - starting a conversation - responding appropriately and relevantly - using the

right body language - role play in different situations.

Vocabulary Building - synonyms and antonyms, word roots, one-word substitutes, prefixes

and suffixes, study of word origin, analogy, idioms and phrases.

Reading Comprehension - reading for facts, guessing meanings from context, scanning, skimming, inferring meaning, Critical reading.

Writing Skills - structure and presentation of different types of writing - Resume writing /

e-correspondence/Technical report writing/Portfolio writing - planning for writing - research

abilities/data collection/ organizing data/tools/analysis - improving one’s writing. r Group

Discussion - dynamics of group discussion, intervention, summarizing, modulation of voice,

body language, relevance, fluency and coherence.

1. Presentation Skills - Oral presentations (individual and group) through JAM sessions/seminars

and written presentations through posters/projects/reports/PPTs/e-mails/assignments etc.

2. Interview Skills - concept and process, pre-interview planning, opening strategies, answering

strategies, interview through telphone and video-conferencing.

Minimum Requirement:

The English Language Lab shall have two parts:

The Computer aided Language Lab for 60 students with 60 systems, one master console,

LAN facility and English language software for self- study by learners.

The Communication Skills Lab with movable chairs and audio-visual aids with.a P.A

System, a T. V., a digital stereo -audio & video system and camcorder etc.

System Requirement ( Hardware component):

Computer network with LAN with minimum 60 multimedia systems with the following

specifications:

> P - IV Processor

a) Speed-2.8 GHZ

b) RAM-512 MB Minimum

c) Hard Disk - 80 GB

> Headphones of High quality

• Suggested Software:

The software consisting of the prescribed topics elaborated above should be procured

and used.

Suggested Software:

Clarity Pronunciation Power - part II Oxford Advanced Learner’s Compass, 7th Edition

DELTA’S key to the Next Generation TOEFL Test: Advanced

Skill Practice.

Lingua TOEFL CBT Insider, by Dreamtech

TOEFL & GRE( KAPLAN. AARCO & BARRONS, USA. Cracking GRE by CLIFFS)

The following software from ‘train2success.com’

Preparing for being Interviewed,

Positive Thinking.



Interviewing Skills,

Telephone Skills,

Time Management

Team Building,

Decision making

• English in Mind. Herbert Puchta and Jeff Stranks with Meredith Levy, Cambridge

Books Recommended:

1. Technical Communication by Meenakshi Raman & Sangeeta Sharma, Oxford University

Press 2009.

2. Advanced Communication Skills Laboratory Manual by Sudha Rani, D, Pearson

Education 201 English Language Communication : A Reader cum Lab Manual Dr A

Ramakrishna Rao, Dr G Natanam & Prof SA Sankaranarayanan, Anuradha Publications,

Chennai 2008.

3. English Vocabulary in Use series, Cambridge University Press 2008.

4. Management Shapers Series by Universities Press(India)Pvt Ltd., Himayatnagar,

Hyderabad

5. 2008.

6. Communication Skills by Leena Sen, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

7. Handbook for Technical Writing by David AMcMurrey & Joanne Buckely CEXGAGE

Learning

8. 2008.

9. Job Hunting by Colm Downes, Cambridge University Press 2008.

10. Master Public Speaking by Anne Nicholls, JAICO Publishing House, 2006.

11. English for Technical Communication for Engineering Students, Aysha Vishwamohan.

Tata Me

12. Graw-Hil 2009.

13. Books on TOEFL/GRE/GMAT/CAT/ IELTS by Barron s/DELTA/ Cambridge

University Press.

14. International English for Call Centres by Barry Tomalin and Suhashini Thomas,

Macmillan Publishers, 2009.

DISTRIBUTION AND WEIGHTAGE OF .MARKS:

Advanced Communication Skills Lab Practicals: The practical examinations for the English Language Laboratory practice shall be

conducted as per the University norms prescribed for the core engineering practical

sessions.

For the English Language lab sessions, there shall be a continuous evaluation during

the year for 25 sessional marks and 50 End Examination marks. Of the 25 marks, 15

marks shall be awarded for day-to-day work and 10 marks to be awarded by

conducting Internal Lab Test(s). The End Examination shall be conducted by the

teacher concerned with the help of another member of the staff of the same

department of the same institution.



15.8. SESSION PLANNER

MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE

ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Objectives

Program Outcomes


I S S S S S S S

II S S S S S S S

III S H S S S S S

IV S H S S H S S S


MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course Outcomes

Program Outcomes


a S S S S S S S

b S H S S S S S

c S S S S S S

d S S S S




MAPPING OF BLOOMS TAXONOMY WITH COURSE OUTCOMES

3. Applying /

Application:

Use a concept in

a new situation or unprompted

use of an

abstraction. Applies what

was learned in

the classroom into novel

situations in the

work place.

Key Words:

Apply, Build,

Choose, Construct,

Develop,

Experiment, with, Identify,

Interview, Make

use of, Model, Organize, Plan,

Select, Solve,

Utilize

5. Evaluating /

Evaluation:

Make judgments

about the value of ideas or

materials.

Key Words: Agree, Appraise, Assess, Award,

Choose,

Compare, Conclude,

Criteria,

Criticize, Decide, Deduct,

Defend,

Determine, Disprove,

Estimate,

Evaluate, Explain,

Importance,

Influence,

Interpret, Judge,

Justify, Mark, Measure,

Opinion,

Perceive, Prioritize, Prove,

Rate,

Recommend, Rule on, Select,

Support, value

6. Creating / Synthesis : Builds a structure or pattern from diverse elements. Put parts together 4. Analyzing / to form a

Blooms

Taxonomy

Analysis : Separates material or concepts into

whole, with emphasis on

creating a component parts new meaning 2. Understanding / so that its or structure. Comprehension : organizational

1. Remembering / Comprehending the structure may be Key Words: Knowledge: meaning, translation, understood. Adapt, Build, Recall or retrieve interpolation, and Distinguishes Change, previous learned interpretation of between facts and Choose, information. instructions and inferences. Combine,

problems. State a Compile, Course

Outcomes Key Words: problem in one's own Key Words: Compose,

Choose, Define, words. Analyze, Assume, Construct, Find, Categorize, Create,

How, Label, List, Key Words: Classify, Delete,

Match, Name, Classify, Compare, Compare, Design, Omit, Recall, Contrast, Conclusion, Develop,

Relate, Select, Demonstrate, Contrast, Discuss,

Show, Spell, Tell, Explain, Extend, Discover, Dissect, Elaborate, What, When, Illustrate, Infer, Distinguish, Estimate,

Where, Which, Interpret, Outline, Divide, Examine, Formulate, Who, Why Relate, Rephrase, Function, Happen,

Show, Summarize, Inference, Imagine, Translate Inspect, List, Improve, Motive, Invent, Make Relationships, up, Simplify, Survey, Maximize, Take, part, in, Minimize, Test For, Theme Modify, Original, Originate, Plan, Predict, Propose, Solution, Solve, Suppose, Test, Theory

a.Understand the basic laws of

heat transfer,

account for the consequence of

heat transfer in

thermal analyses

of engineering

systems.

√

√

√

b.Analyze

problems

involving steady state heat

conduction in

simple geometries,

develop

solutions for transient heat

conduction in simple geometries.

√

√



c.Obtain numerical

solutions for

conduction and radiation heat

transfer

problems, understand the

fundamentals of

convective heat transfer process.

√

√

√

d.Evaluate heat transfer

coefficients for

natural

convection,

inside ducts.

Evaluate heat transfer

coefficients for forced

convection over exterior surfaces.

√

√

√

Date post:	22-Apr-2023
Category:	Documents
Upload:	khangminh22
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times

MLR Institute of Technology

Documents